english6
Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (725.65 KB, 202 trang )
<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>
<b>Week 1:</b>
Preparing date: 20/08/10
Teaching date: 23/08/10
<b> Period 1: </b>
<b> Review</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review the main contents of the
lessons which are learned in class 6:
<b>II. Language contents: </b>
1.Grammar: The simple present tense, the present continuous tense,
future tense, wh- questions,
2. Vocabulary: School facilities, means of transport, sports and activities..
<b>III.Techniques: question & answers, gaps fill</b>
<b>IV.Teaching aids: Workbook, T’s Book</b>
<b>V.Procedure:</b>
<b> Teacher’s Activities</b> <b> Students’s Activities</b>
<b>I.Vocabulary(10’)</b>
-Asks Sts to work in 4 groups to complete the network
in 4 topics.
1.School facilities
2.Means of transport
3.Sports and Activities
4.Food and drink
-Corrects
<b>II.Grammar(15’)</b>
1. The present simple tense.
*Imparrative
I
We He
You +V(bare inf)+….. / She +V(s/es)
They It
*Negative
I
We
You + do not(don’t)+ V(bare inf)+…..
He/ She/ It +does not(doesn’t) +V(bare inf)
*Interrogative
Do + You/They + V(bare inf) ? -Yes,I/We do
-No,they/we don’t
-Work in 4 groups to complete the
network in 4 topics.
Present the words
-Take note
_Remember the structures
-Take note
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>
He
Does + She + V(inf) ? -Yes,He/she/It does
It -No,He/she?It doesn’t
2. The present continuos tense:
(+) S + am / is / are + Ving .
(-) S + am / is / are + not + Ving.
(?) Am / is / are + S + Ving ?
3. future tense:
(+) S + am / is / are + going to + V.
(-) S + am / is / are + not + going to + V.
(?) Am / is / are + S + going to + V ?
4. Wh- questions :
* What :
- What’s your name ? => My name is An.
What’s her name ? => Her name is Hoa
- What do you do? => I am a teacher .
What does he do ? => He is a doctor .
* Where :
Where do you live? => I live on Nguyen Du street .
Where does she live ? => She lives at 135 Hang Bai
Street.
* How many + Ns .
How many students are there in your class?
…………..tables ………?
* What time / When
What time do you usually get up ?
When do you do your homework?
* How :
- How are you ? => I’m fine, thanks.
- How do you go to school every day ? => I go to
school by bike .
* How old : How old are you ?
* Why? Why does he have bad marks?
* Which : Which class are you in?
* Who : Who is Mrs. Lan talking to?
<b>III. Practice (15’)</b>
Ask Ss to do exercises , then the teacher
corrects them .
Exercise 1: Supply the correct forms of the verbs in
brackets.
Take note
-Review the wh-questions
-Do exercises
Exercise 1: Supply the correct forms
of the verbs in brackets.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>
1. My brother ( do ) ……….his homework
in his room now,
He ( do ) ……….it everyday.
2. They ( visit ) ………..us next week .
3. It usually ( rain )……… in the rainy
season.
4. I ( not go ) ……….to school on
Sunday .
5. Listen! I think the telephone ( ring )
……….
Exercise 2 : Make questions for underlined words.
1. Mr. Quang lives on Hung Vuong street .
2. Her new friends come from Australia.
3. There are 13.6 million people in Mexico city .
4. Nam usually has lunch at 11:30.
5. Hoa is going to play badminton with her friend.
<b>IV. Consolidation (5’)</b>
-Reminds the language contents in the lesson
Preparing date :
UNIT ONE : A1,2
Exercise 2 : Make questions for
underlined words.
-Remember
Self-evaluation………
……….
<b>Week 1:</b>
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>
Teaching date: 23/08/10
Period 2: BACK TO SCHOOL
Lesson 1 : A- Friends ( A1,2 )
I. Objectives :
After the lesson, students will review the greetings and introduce themselves .
II. Language content:
1. Vocabulary:
- Nice to meet you . – Just fine/ not bad
- How is everything? - Pretty good./ so am I.
2. Grammar:
The present simple tense.
3.Skills:L,S,R,W
III. Technique :
Eliciting, pair work, group work, ask and answer, net work
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook, tape, cassette.
V. Procedure :
<b>T’activities</b> <b>Ss’ activities</b>
<b>I. Warm up :</b>
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game called slap the board.
T reads the questions
a. What’s your name?
b. How are you today?
c. What class are you in?
d. Goodbye.
e. Are you a new student?
- Demonstrate the group which wins the game.
<b>II. New lesson :</b>
1.Listen .Then practice with a partner
a) Listen. Then practice with a partner.
- Introduce some situations:
+ Nice to see/ meet you .
+ Nice to see / meet you again.
+ So am I.
- Greetings.
- 2 groups play game.
- Listen.
-Listen to the introduction
- Listen and write down.
- Read in chorus and individually.
Goodbye Yes, I am
Very well,
thanks
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>
- Have Ss look at the books and listen to the
tape.
- Ask Ss to read in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to role-play the dialogue
in front of the class.
- Correct the mistake.
- Ask Ss to look at the answers then work in
pairs.
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer the
questions in front of the class.
- Correct then give the correct answers.
b) Listen. Then practice with a partner.
- Ask Ss to look at the picture in part 3 and
introduce the picture.
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct their pronunciation .
+ Ok. How are you today?
+Just fine.
+ So am I.
- Have Ss role-play the completed dialogues in
pairs.
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogues in
front of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.
d) Ask Ss to look at 4 pictures in part 5.
- Ask Ss about the people in these pictures.
Who are they?
What are they doing?
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape then write the
letters of the dialogues in the order they hear.
- Play the tape for Ss.
- Call on some Ss to give the answers.
- Play the tape again and ask them to check
their answers.
- Correct and give correct answers.
1-C 2-B 3- D 4-A
- Ask Ss to base on the picture and make the
dialogues.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
- Look at the books and listen to the
tape.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Write down.
- Look at the picture and listen.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Complete the dialogues.
- Listen and write down.
- Complete the dialogues
individually.
- Exchange the result with the
partner.
- Give the answers.
- Copy down.
- Work in pairs.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>
class.
- Correct the mistakes if necessary.
3. Consolidation:
- Have Ss work in pairs making a dialogue.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Remark.
4. Homework:
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines
for each word.
- Complete the dialogue in part 4 in exercise
book. Do exercise 1, 2 in workbook.
- Prepare part A2.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Answer the questions.
-- Listen to the tape and write the
order of the pictures.
- Listen to the tape.
- Give the answers.
- Listen again and check the answers
- Copy down.
- Make dialogues in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Write homework.
Preparing date: Saturday, September 1st 2008
Period 3:
<b>UNIT ONE: BACK TO SCHOOL</b>
Lesson 2: A- Friends (A2)
I. The aims:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the information about Hoa
and practice reading skill.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>
1. Vocabulary:
- To be different from…
- Unhappy >< happy
- To miss
2. Grammar:
Review: - The present simple tense.
- Comparison.
III. Technique:
Eliciting, using pictures, pair work, group work.
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, cassette, tape, pictures.
V. Procedure:
Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game.
Keywords: School, old, big, happy, uncle,
new, friend, live, student, parent.
- Demonstrate the group which wins the
game.
2. Pre- reading:
- Introduce the situation, then explain some
new words:
+ Different ( adj) : ( give 2 things in order to
compare )
+ Unhappy (adj) >< happy
+ To miss (v) : ( give a situation )
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually.
* Check new words by playing a game: rub
out and remember.
- Have Ss do an exercise in groups : Ordering
statements.
a. Hoa’s school in Hue is small.
b. Hoa is a new student in class 7A.
c. Hoa’s new school is bigger than her old
school.
d. Hoa is from Hue.
e. Now she lives in Hanoi.
- Call on some groups to give their
predictions in front of the class.
3. While- reading:
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the
tape, then correct their predictions.
- Ask Ss to check the result with their partner.
- Greetings.
- Play a game in 2 groups.
2 groups take part in the game to find
out the words which have been learnt.
- Clap hands.
- Listen and write down.
- Guess the meanings.
- Read new words in chorus and
individually.
- Play a game.
- Work in groups.
- Give the predictions.
- Listen and correct the predictions.
- Check the result.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>
- Correct and give the correct answer:
1.b 2.d 3.e 4.a 5.c
- Have Ss read the text in silent.
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.
- Ask Ss to read the questions and the text
again, then work in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class.
- Correct and give the correct answers.
a. She is from Hue.
b. She is staying with her uncle and aunt.
c. No, she doesn’t.
d. Her new school is bigger than her old
school.
e. She is unhappy because she misses her
parents and her friends.
4.Post-reading:
- Have Ss play a game : Guessing game.
( each student writes a sentence in the text )
5. Homework:
- Learn by heart part 2 and write the answers
in the exercise book.
- Do exercise 3,4 in work book.
- Prepare B1,2,3.
- Copy down.
- Read in silent.
- Read aloud.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Write down.
- Play a game.
- Write homework.
Week 2:
Preparing date: Friday, September 7th 2008
Period 4:
UNIT ONE : BACK TO SCHOOL
Lesson 3: B- Names and addresses.( B1,2,3)
I. The aims:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about personal
information such as: name, age, address…
II. Language content:
1. Vocabulary:
- Family name (n)
- Middle name (n )
- Address (n)
2. Grammar.
- The simple present tense.
- Structure: What’s your family name?
What’s your middle name?
III. Technique:
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, tape, cassette, sub-board.
V. Procedure:
Teacher’s Activities Students’Activities
1. Warm up:
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game called: Noughts and
Crosses .
- Have Ss ask and answer about the information
in the grids.
- Remark and demonstrate the group which wins
the game.
2. New activities:
a) Listen. Then practice with a partner.
- Introduce the situation of the dialogue, then
explain some new words.
+ Family name (n) : ( the first name )
+ Middle name (n) :
+ Address (n) : ( where you live)
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually.
- Correct their pronunciation.
- Ask Ss to look at their books and listen to the
tape .
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue.
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front
of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.
- Ask Ss to look at the questions then work in
pairs : one asks and one answers.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistakes and give the correct
answers:
a. She is talking to Mrs. Lien.
b. Her family name is Pham.
c. Her middle name is Thi.
d. She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street.
- Give some cues then ask Ss to practice in pairs.
+ Nam – Nguyen – 15 – 32 Nguyen Du
street.
+ Hoa – Pham – 12 – THD street.
+ Minh – Tran – 13 – Da Nang.
- Greetings.
- Play a game in 2 groups.
Ask and answer the questions.
EX: S1: How old are you?
S2: I’m 13
- Listen and write.
- Guess the meanings.
- Read new words in chorus and
individually.
- Listen to the tape.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice asking and answering in
front of the class.
- Copy down.
- Practice in pairs using the cues.
You 54 Quang Trung Hoa
13 Street
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>
+ Thuy – Bui – 14 – LHP street.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistakes if necessary.
b) Write . Complete this dialogue.
- Introduce the situation of part 2.
- Ask Ss to complete the dialogue .
- Ask them to exchange the result with their
partner.
- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of
the class.
- Correct and give the correct answers:
Who- Who – What/which – Where – Where
– How.
- Call on some pairs to read the completed
dialogue aloud.
- Correct their pronunciation.
3. Consolidation:
- Have Ss ask the partner questions then complete
the form.
- Ask Ss to give the questions for the information.
- Make model with a student:
EX: What’s your name?
How old are you?
Which grade are you in?
What’s your school’s name? or Which school
do you study at?
Where do you live?
- Have Ss work in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Remark.
4. Homework:
- Complete the form in the exercise book.
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 5,6 in workbook.
- Prepare part B4,5.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Listen.
- Complete the dialogue.
- Exchange the result with the
partner.
- Give the answers.
- Copy down.
- Practice reading the dialogue.
- Ask the partner and complete the
form.
- Give the questions.
- A student answer the
teacher’questions.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Write homework.
Preparing date: Saturday, September 8th 2008
Period 5:
UNIT ONE: BACK TO SCHOOL
Lesson 4: B – Names and addresses (B4, 5)
I. The aims:
By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask and answer about
distances. Practice listening, speaking, reading and writing skills.
II. Language content:
Structure: How far is it from ………to ……….?
It’s about ……….
III. Technique:
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, cassette, tape, pictures.
V. Procedure:
Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities
1. Warm up:
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game : Word square
- Ask Ss to find out the words in order to ask
and prepositions.
-Have Ss play in 2 groups.
- Remark and demonstrate the group which
wins the game.
2. New activities:
a) Listen. Then practice with a partner.
- Ask Ss some questions such as:
+ Where do you live?
+ How do you go to school?
=> Then lead in new structure:
+ How far is it from your house to school?
=> It’s about one kilometer.
- Have Ss make sentences with new structure.
- Have Ss look at the books and listen to the
tape.
- Ask them to read the dialogue in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front
of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.
- Ask Ss some questions:
+ Where does Hoa live?
+ Is it far from school?
+ How does she get there?
b) Ask and answer with a partner.
- Have Ss look at 4 pictures in part 5.
- Ask them to practice in pairs asking and
answering about distances .
EX: How far is it from your house to the
market?
It’s about one kilometer.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistakes if necessary.
3. Consolidation:
- Give some given cues then ask Ss to practice
in pairs.
+ Market / 2 km
+ Post office / 700 meters
+ School / 1 km
- Greetings.
- Play a game in 2 groups.
Where, who, what, why, how, when.
on, at, by, from, to.
- Answer T’s questions.
- Listen and write down.
- Make sentences .
- Look at the book and listen to the
tape.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front the class.
- Answer T’s questions.
- Look at 4 pictures in the book.
- Practice in pairs .
- Practice in front of the class.
- Work in pairs.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>
+ Bus stop / 5oo meters
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Have Ss make a dialogue based on the
dialogue between Nam and Hoa.
- Call on some pairs to practice.
4. Homework:
- Write part 5 in the exercise book.
- Do exercise4,5 at page 6,7 in workbook.
- Prepare part B6,7.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Make a dialogue.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Write homework.
Preparing date : Sunday, September 9th 2008
Period6:
UNIT ONE : BACK TO SCHOOL
Lesson 5: B – Names and addresses ( B 6,7)
I. The aims:
The students will continue to practice asking and answering about distances.
Practice listening and speaking skills.
II. Language content:
Review the structure : How far is it from…….to ……..?
It’s about ………….
III. Technique:
Eliciting, using pictures, pairwork.
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.
V. Procedure:
Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings.
- Ask Ss some questions about themselves.
EX: What’s your name?
How old are you?
Where do you live?
How far is it from your house to school?
How do you go to school?
- Remark and give marks.
2. New activities:
a) Listen and write.
How far is it ? Write the four distances.
- Introduce the situation of the lesson.
- Ask Ss to look at the picture in part 6.
- Have Ss call the names of the places.
- Ask Ss some questions such as:
+ Is Lan’s house near or far from school?
+ Is Lan’s house near the market/ the post office/
the theater?
- Greetings.
- Answer T’s questions.
- Write new lesson.
- Listen.
- Look at the picture.
- Call the names of the places.
- Answer T’s questions.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape then find out the
distance between the places.
- play the tape for Ss 2 times.
- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.
- Call on some Ss to give the results in front of the
class.
- Play the tape again for Ss to check their answers.
- Correct and give the correct answers:
a. School to Lan’s house : 300m
b. Lan’s house to the post offfice : 700m
c. School to the movie theater : 3km
d. Movie theater to the post office : 2km
- Have Ss practice asking and answering the
distance between the places.
- Correct the mistake.
b) A survey:
- Ask Ss to look at the form in part 7.
- Introduce the aim of this part: Ask their
classmates some information then fill in the form.
- Have Ss give the questions for the information.
- Make model with a student:
+ What’s your name?
+ Where do you live?
+ How do you go to school?
+ How far is it from your house to school?
- Have Ss work in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
3. Consolidation;
- Ask Ss to base on the information and write a
short passage about their partner.
EX: My friend is……..He/She lives at………..
He/ She goes to school by………It’s about……..
from……….to……..
- Call on one student to go to the board and write,
some Ss read aloud.
- Correct the mistakes if necessary.
* Remember:
- Ask Ss to look at the remember and practice in
pairs, using the questions in the box.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct if necessary.
4. Homework:
- Write part 6 in the exercise book.
- Make questions and answers in part remember.
- Prepare unit 2- A1,2,3.
- Listen to the tape.
- Find out 4 distances.
- Exchange the results with the
partners.
- Give the results.
- Listen to the tape and check.
- Practice asking and answering
- Look at the form in part 7.
- Listen.
- Give the questions for the
information.
- Answer T’s questions.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Write a short passage.
- Write on the board and read
aloud.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Write homework.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>
Week 3:
Preparing date : Thursday, September 13th 2008
Period 7:
UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION
LESSON 1 : TELEPHONENUMBERS (A1, 2,3)
I. The aims:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for and give telephone numbers
and further practice in addresses. They continue to practice 4 skills.
II. Language content:
- Telephone directory.
- To call somebody.
- What’s your telephone number?
III. Technique:
Explanation, asking and answering, pairwork.
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook , tape , cassette.
V. Procedure:
Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- greetings.
- Ask Ss some questions :
+ Where do you live?
+ Does your home have a telephone?
……..
=> Lead in new lesson.
2. Presentation:
- Introduce: Nowadays telephone has been very
popular in our social communication. In this
lesson we’ll deal with this matter.
- Explain some new words:
+ Telephone directory( n):
+ To call ( somebody) :
- Ask Ss to look at part 3 and listen to the tape.
- Explain the model:
+ What’s your telephone number?
8 262 019
+ What’ her telephone number?
- Have ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front
of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.
3. practice :
- Ask Ss to read the telephone numbering the
telephone directory in part 1 => explain the way
of reading.
- Call on some Ss to read the telephone numbers
aloud.
- Ask them to practice asking and answering
about the telephone number in the telephone
directory.
- Make model:
What’s TanA’s telephone number?
8 211 800
- Greetings.
- Answer T’s questions.
- Listen.
- Write down.
Read new words.
- Look at the book and listen to
the tape.
- Listen and write.
- Read in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Read the telephone numbers.
- Read aloud.
- Practice asking and answering.
- Listen.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>
- Have Ss work in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistakes if necessary.
- Ask Ss to listen some people’s telephone
numbers , then write the numbers they hear.
- Play the tape for Ss 2 times.
- Ask them to exchange the results with the
partners.
- Call on some Ss give the answers.
- Play the tape again and ask Ss to check the
answers.
- Correct and give the correct answers:
a. 8 251 654 d. 8 352 793
b. 8 250 514 e. 8 237 041
c. 8 521 936 f. 8 821 652
4. Production:
- Ask Ss to have a survey.
Name Address Telephone number
- Have Ss work in pairs asking about the
information given, using these questions:
+ What’s your name?
+ Where do you live?
+ What’s your telephone number?
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistake.
5. Homework:
- Write the questions and answers about
telephone numbers of the people in part 1 ( 6 )
- Prepare part A4,5 .
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Listen and write.
- Exchange the results with the
partners.
- Give the answers.
- Listen to the tape and check.
- Write down.
- Take a survey.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in pairs in front of the
class.
- Write homework.
Preparing date: Friday, September 14th 2008
Period 8 :
UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION
Lesson 2: A – Telephone numbers ( A4,5)
I. The aims:
After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about sure events in the future by
using“ Will” positive statements and “ Wh” questions.
II. Language content:
- To meet ( v ) - Free ( adj )
- To see a movie
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>
- Don’t be late.
* Future tense:
S + will + V .
S + will not + V
Will + S + V?
III. Technique:
Explanation, pairwork , groupwork
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, tape, cassette, sub-board.
V. Procedure:
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game; Jumbled words
ESE; TRAST ; VOMEI ; REHATTE
ROMTOROW : TALE
- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write.
- Remark and give marks.
2. Presentation:
- Have Ss look at the picture and ask them to
guess the talk.
- Introduce some new words and structures:
+ Would you like to + V ?
Would you like to see a movie?
+ Where will we meet?
+ Let’s meet at 6:45
+ Don’t be late.
* Future tense:
(+) S + Will + V .
(-) S + will not + V .
(?) Will + S + V ?
EX: She will go to Hanoi tomorrow.
I will not play soccer this afternoon.
Will you buy a new book ?
- Ask Ss to make sentences based on the models.
3. Practice
- Play the tape for Ss.
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to role-play the dialogue in
front of the class.
- Correct the pronunciation.
- Ask Ss to look at the questions then work in
pairs .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of
the class.
- Correct the mistakes and give the correct
answers:
a. Phong and Tam will.
b. They will see a movie.
c. They will meet at 6:45
d. They will meet in front of the movie theater.
- Give some cues then ask Ss to practice.
+ Where / meet / on the street.
+ What time/ meet / 7:00
- Greetings.
- Play a game
- Go to the board and write.
- Look at the picture and guess.
- Listen and write.
- Make sentences.
- Listen to the tape.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Work in pairs.
- Ask and answer in front of the
class.
- Write down.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>
+ What / see / a movie.
+ How / go / bike.
EX: Where will we meet?
We’ll meet on the street.
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistake.
4. Further practice:
* Listen, then write the answers.
- Introduce the aim of the lesson for Ss .
- Ask them to listen to the tape carefully and find
out the information to complete the table.
- Play the tape for Ss 2 times.
- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.
- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of
the class.
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and check the
answers.
- Correct and give the correct answers:
a. 8 545 545
b. a movie
c. Lan’s house
d. Bus
- Ask Ss to base on the information in the box to
write a short passage.
- Call on one student to go to the board and
write , some Ss read the passage aloud.
- Correct.
5. Homework.
- Learn by heart new structures by making 5
sentences with each.
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 8 in workbook.
- Prepare A6,7.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Listen carefully.
- Listen and complete the table.
- Listen to the tape.
- Exchange the result with the
partner.
- Give the answers.
- Listen again to check the
answer.
- Listen and write.
- Write a passage.
- Go to the board and write.
- Read aloud.
- Write homework.
Preparing date: Saturday, September 15th 2008
Period 9:
UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION
Lesson 3 : A – Telephone numbers ( A6,7)
I. The aims:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice and use the simple future
tense with Will , Wh- questions and answer fluently.
II. Language content:
1. Vocabulary :
- Who’s calling? - To be out
- Can I speak to….? To be back.
- I’ll call again.
2. Grammar:
The simple future tense.
III. Technique:
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, tape. cassette.
V. Procedure:
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings.
- Ask Ss some questions and ask them to make a
dialogue.
- Call on 2 pairs to make dialogues aloud.
- Remark and give mark.
2. Presentation:
- Explain some structures when talking on the
phone.
+ Who’s calling?
+ Can/ Could I speak to ……..?
+ I’ll call again.
+ To be out
+ To be back.
EX: Can I speak to Lan?
She is out .
- Ask Ss to make sentences.
- Correct the mistakes.
3. Practice :
- Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and read in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front
of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.
- Have Ss read the dialogue again then find out
the answers for the questions.
- Have Ss work in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of
the class.
- Correct the mistake and give the correct
answers:
a. Phong is.
b. Han is.
c. About Lan.
d. At about 6 o’clock.
e. After 6.
- Use the title of A7 to set a scene and ask Ss to
find the questions for the answers.
a. At five thirty.
b. We’ll eat cakes and sweets.
c. Till seven or half past.
d. We’ll meet in the street.
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape then read after the
tape.
- Call on some Ss to read aloud.
- Correct their pronunciation.
4. Production:
- Give a mapped dialogue.
Tan Nam
What…….do
- Greetings.
- Answer T’s questions.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Listen and write.
Read in chorus and individually.
- Make sentences.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice reading in front of the
class.
- Read the dialogue again and find
the answers.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Copy down.
- Listen carefully and find the
questions.
- Listen to the tape and read after
the tape.
- Read aloud.
- Look at the mapped dialogue.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>
tomorrow morning? go……..stadium
What……watch? A football match/
would …like…with me?
Yes, when…..start? 4:30 / ……meet at 4:15
Where ……meet? in front of …stadium.
ok.
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistake.
- Ask Ss to read the remember carefully.
- Call on some Ss to read aloud.
5. Homework:
- Learn by heart new structures by making 3
sentences with each and learn by heart remember.
- Do exercise 3,4,5 at page 9 in workbook.
- Prepare part B1,2,3.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Read the remember.
- Write homework.
Week 4 :
Preparing date : Wednesday, September 19th 2008
Period 10:
UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION
Lesson 4 : B - My birthday ( B1,2,3)
I. The aims :
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write and speak about ordinal
numbers, months and the dates of the months fluently.
II. Language content:
1. Vocabulary:
- Dates of the months.
- Ordinal numbers.
2. Grammar:
Review: The simple future tense.
III. Technique:
Explanation, asking and answering.
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, tape, cassette, calendar.
V. Procedure:
Ts’ Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game called pelmanism
1st 2nd 10th 5th 3rd 9th
First second tenth fifth third ninth
- Remark and lead in new lesson.
2. New activities
a) Listen and repeat.
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape.
- Explain some ordinal numbers.
+ Ordinal numbers + th
+ Special cases:
First : 1st Ninth : 9th
Second : 2nd Twelfth : 12th
- Greetings.
- Play a game in groups.
- Listen.
- Look at the books and listen.
- Listen and write .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>
Third : 3rd Twentieth : 20th
Fifth : 5th Thirtieth : 30th
- Play the tape for Ss and ask them to read after the
tape.
- Call on some Ss to read aloud.
- Ask Ss to speak about festival Days of Vietnam.
2/9 ; 30/4 ; 20/11 ; 8/3
- Remark.
b) Listen and write the dates.
- Ask Ss to look at the book and answer the
question:
What is it?
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and write the
numbers.
- Play the tape for Ss 2 times.
- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.
- Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of
the class.
- Play the tape again for Ss to check.
- Correct and give the correct answers:
The first of july. The fourteenth
The nineteenth The seventeenth
The sixth The thirty- first
- Ask Ss to write down.
c) Write the months in order from first to twelfth.
- Ask Ss some questions such as:
How many months are there in a year?
- Have Ss do exercise : Matching
January th¸ng 10
February Th¸ng 7
March Th¸ng 5
April Th¸ng 12
May Th¸ng 1
June Th¸ng 4
July Th¸ng 9
August Th¸ng 2
September Th¸ng 6
October Th¸ng 11
November Th¸ng 3
December Th¸ng 8
- Ask Ss to do exercise individually.
- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.
- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of
the class.
- Correct and ask Ss to read aloud .
- Have Ss write down.
3. Consolidation:
- Repeat the ordinal numbers.
4. Homework:
- learn by heart ordinal numbers.
- Do exercises 1,2 at page 10 in workbook.
- Prepare B4,5.
- Read after the tape.
- Read aloud.
- Practice speaking:
The second of september
The thirtieth of april
The twentieth of november
The eighth of march
- Answer T’s question.
A calendar of july.
- Listen to the tape and write.
- Exchange the result with the
partner.
- Give the answers.
- Listen to the tape again and
check.
- Write down.
- Answer T’s question.
- Do exercise.
- Exchange the result with the
partner.
- Give the answer.
- Read aloud.
- Copy down.
- Listen.
- Write homework.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>
Preparing date : Thursday, September 20th 2008
Period 11 :
UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION
Lesson 5: B – My birthday ( B4,5)
I. The aims :
After the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and answer about the date of birth
fluently and they continue to practice the simple future tense.
II. Language content:
1. Vocabulary:
- Nervous - To worry
- Worried
2. Grammar :
The simple future tense.
III. Technique:
Eliciting, pairwork, asking and answering.
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook, pictures, sub- board
V. Procedure:
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
-Have Ss play a game called Lucky numbers.
1) What’s your family name?
2) How old are you?
3) LN
4) What’s your address?
5) What’s your telephone number?
6) What’s your date of birth?
7) LN
8) Who do you live with?
9) How old will you be on your next birthday?
10) LN
- Remark and lead in new lesson.
2. New activities
a) Listen. Then practice with a partner.
- Ask Ss to look at the picture about Mr Tan and
Hoa . Then Ask Ss to guess what Mr Tan is asking
Hoa.
- Call on some Ss to answer.
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and give the
information.
- Explain some new words:
+ Nervous ( adj) :
+ To worry(v) :
+ Worried ( adj ) :
- Have Ss read in chorus and individually.
- Check new words by playing What and where.
- Play the tape for Ss to listen again.
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to read in front of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.
- Greetings.
- Play a game in 2 groups.
- Listen.
- Look at the picture and guess.
- Answer.
- Give the information:
+ Name.
+ Date of birth.
+ Address
+ Telephone number.
- Listen and copy .
- Read in chorus and
individually.
- Play a game.
- Listen to the tape.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice reading in front of the
class.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>
- Ask Ss to look at the questions and work in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering in front of the class.
- Call on one studnent to go to the board and write
the answers.
- Correct and ask Ss to copy down.
* About you:
- Ask a student some questions in part about you.
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
b) Read the dialogue again . then complete this
form.
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and complete
the form.
- Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner.
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering
about the information in the form.
- Call on 2 Ss to ask and answer in front of the
class.
- Correct and ask Ss to complete the form in the
notebooks.
3. Consolidation:
- Ask Ss to base on the information in the dialogue
to make a dialogue.
- Have Ss work in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct if necessary.
4. Homework:
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for
each.
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 11 in workbook.
- Prepare part B6,7,8,9.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Write the answers on the board.
- Copy down.
- Answer T’s questions.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Read the dialogue again.
- Complete the form.
- Exchange the result with the
partner.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Copy down.
- Make a dialogue.
- Work in pairs.
Practice in front of the class.
- Write homework.
Preparing date : Friday, September 21st 2008
Period 12:
UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION
Lesson 6 : B – My birthday ( B6,7,8,9)
I. The aims:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write an invitation card for a birthday
party. They will use the dates of the month fluently.
II. Language content:
1. Vocabulary:
- Birthday party. – To join
- To invite - Fun
- To finish - Invitation card
2. Grammar:
Review : The simple future tense
III. Technique:
Eliciting, pairwork, groupwork, using card.
IV. Teaching aids:
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>
V. Procedure:
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game : Networks
cakes
- Call on 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and
write .
- Remark and lead in new lesson.
2. New activities:
a) Read. Then complete the card.
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the
questions:
+ What is Lan doing?
+ What are they doing in the picture?
- Explain some new words:
+ Birthday party (n) :
+ To invite (v) :
+ Invitation card (n) :
+ To finish (v) = to end
+ To join (v) = to take part in
+ fun (n) :
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually.
- Have Ss play a game : rub out and remember.
- Ask Ss to read the text about Lan and find out the
answers to the questions.
+ How old is she now?
+ Where does she live?
+ When is her birthday?
+ When will the party start and finish?
- Call on some Ss to answer the questions.
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.
- Ask Ss to look at the invitation card of Lan and
then complete it, using the information from the
text.
- Have Ss compare the result with the partner.
- Call on some Ss to read the completed card aloud.
- Correct the mistake and ask Ss to write in the
notebooks.
b) Think and write. Imagine you will be a guest at
Lan’s birthday party.
- Have Ss imagine they will be a guest at Lan’s
birthday party. What will they do?
- Have Ss work in groups of 4 or 5 discussing what
they will bring to Lan’s birthday party.
- Go around the class and hepl Ss if necessary.
- Greetings.
- Play a game in 2 groups.
Discuss in groups.
- Go to the board and write.
- Look at the pictures and
answer .
- Listen and write .
- Guess the meanings .
- Read new words in chorus
and individually.
- Play a game.
- Read the text and find the
answers for the questions.
- Answer the questions.
- Read the text aloud.
- Complete the invitation card.
- Compare with the partner.
- Read aloud.
- Imagine .
- Work in groups.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>
- Call on some representatives to demonstrate in
front of the class.
- Remark.
c) Now write an invitation card to your birthday
party.
- Have Ss write an invitation to their birthday party
based on part 6.
- Ask Ss to exchange their writing with the partner.
- Call on some Ss to read their invitation in front of
the class.
- Remark.
d) Play with words.
- Have Ss look at the book and listen to the tape.
-Ask Ss to read after the tape.
- Call on some Ss to read in front of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.
3. Consolidation:
- Ask Ss to look at the remember and repeat again.
4. Homework:
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for
each. learn by heart part remember.
- Do exercise 4,5 at page 12 in workbook.
- Prepare part A 1,2 ( unit 3)
- Demonstrate in front of the
class.
- Write an invitation.
- Exchange the writing with the
partner.
- Read aloud.
- Listen to the tape.
- read after the tape.
- Read aloud.
- Repeat.
- Write homework.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>
WEEK 5:
Preparing date: Wednesday, September 26th 2008
Period 13 :
UNIT 3 : AT HOME
Lesson 1 : A – What a lovely home ( A1,2)
I. The aims:
After the lesson, Ss will be able to use the exclamations by giving compliments
and complaints , they will learn about the things in the bathroom and the kitchen.
II. Language content:
1. Vocabulary:
- Awful - Washing machine
- Sink - Dryer
- Comfortable - Refrigerator
- Tub - Dishwasher
- Amazing - Electric stove
- Convenient
2. Grammar:
Structure: What + a/ an + adj + N!
What + adj + Ns !
III. Technique:
Explanation, pairwork, groupwork, using pictures.
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.
V. Procedure:
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up:
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game : Networks
- Call on 2 Ss to go to the board and write down.
- Remark and give marks.
2. New activities:
a) Listen. Then practice with a partner.
- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ how many rooms are there in your house?
+ What are they?
+ What is in each room?
- Introduce the situation of the lesson, then
explain some new words:
+ Awful ( adj ) :
+ Comfortable (adj) :
+ Amazing (adj) :
+ Sink (n) :
+ Tub (n) :
+ Washing machine (n ) :
- Greetings.
- Play a game.
- Go to the board and write.
- Answer T’s questions.
- Listen and write.
- Guess meanings.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>
+ Dryer (n) :
+ Refrigerator (n) :
+ Dish washer (n) :
+ Electric stove (n) :
+ Convenient (adj):
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually.
- Check new words by playing : rub out and
remember.
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the
tape , then find out the things in the bathroom
and the kitchen.
- Call on some Ss to tell the things in the
bathroom and the kitchen.
- Remark.
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to practice reading in front
of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering
the questions.
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front
of the class.
- Correct the mistakes and give the correct
answers:
a) Living room, Hoa’s room, bathroom and
kitchen.
b) Because it is bright and it has nice colors.
c) A sink, a tub and a shower.
d) A washing machine, a dryer, a refrigerator, a
dish washer, and an electric stove.
- Have Ss copy down.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering
about themselves, using 2 questions in the book.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
b) Write exclamations:
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find the
exclamations.
- Call on some Ss to read aloud.
- Introduce the exclamations to Ss.
EX: What a hot day ! ( Today is very hot )
What a boring film! ( The film is very boring.)
- Give some situations , then ask Ss to make
exclamations.
+ This boy is very lazy.
+ The story is very interesting.
+ The house is dark.
- Have Ss give the structures.
- Ask Ss to practice making exclamations using
given cues in the book.
- Call on some Ss to read their writing aloud .
- Correct and ask them to write down.
3. Consolidation:
- Ask Ss to use the structures of exclamatioms
- Read new words in chorus and
individually.
- Play a game.
- Listen to the tape and find the
things.
- Give the results.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice reading in front of the
class.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice asking and answering.
- Copy down.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Read the dialogue and find the
exclamations.
- Read aloud.
- Listen and write.
- Make sentences.
- Write exclamations.
- Read aloud.
- Write down.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>
to make sentences.
- Remark.
4. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines
for each .
- Make 5 sentences with complaints and
compliments.
- Do exercies 1,2 at page 13 in workbook.
- Prepare part A3.
- Write homework.
Preparing date : Thursday, September 27th 2008
Period 14 :
UNIT 3 : AT HOME
Lesson 2 : A – What a lovely home ! ( A3,4)
I. The aims:
After the lesson, Ss will review vocabularies about the things in the house and
prepositions of position, using structures : There is…../ There are…..
II. Language content:
Review : - vocabularies about the things in the house.
- Prepositions.
- There is …../ there are …..
III. Technique:
Eliciting, using pictures, mainly communicative.
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook, pictures, sub-board.
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game:Noghts and crosses
- Ask Ss make exclamations.
- Remark.
2. New activities:
a) Look at the picture . then practice with a partner.
* Point and say:
- Ask Ss to look at the picture carefullyand tell the
things in the picture, using there is/ there are….
- Greetings.
- Play a game in 2 groups.
- Making sentences.
- Write lesson.
- Look at the picture and tell
the things.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>
- Make examples:
+ There is a table.
+ There are some chairs.
+ There are some pictures.
- Call on some Ss to say the things in the picture
aloud.
- Correct the mistakes.
- Have Ss write in the notebook.
* Ask and answer.
- Have Ss practice in pairs asking and answering the
things in the picture and using the words in the box.
- Ex: Is there a bookshelf?
Yes, there is.
Where is it?
It is on the wall.
- Have Ss work in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.
- Correct the mistake if necessary.
- Ask Ss to write down.
b) Play with words.
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape.
- Explain some new words:
+ Smell ( n )
+ To forget >< To remember
+ Safe ( adj)
- Have Ss read after the tape.
- Call on some Ss to read aloud.
- Correct their pronunciation.
3. Consolidation:
- Ask Ss to look at the remember and read.
- Call on some Ss to read aloud.
- Ask Ss to make sentences with them.
4. Homework:
- Make sentences with remember.
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 14,15 in workbook.
- Prepare B1,2.
- Listen.
- Say the things in the picture.
- Write down.
- Work in pairs.
- Listen.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Write down.
- Look at the book and listen to
the tape.
- Listen and write.
- Read after the tape.
- Read aloud.
- Read.
- Read aloud.
- Make sentences.
- Write homework.
Preparing date : Friday, September 28th 2008
Period 15:
UNIT 3 : AT HOME
Lesson 3 : B- Hoa’s family ( B1,2 )
I. The aims:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will learn about jobs and job vocabulary. They will
apply the in the life.
II. Language content:
1. Vocabulary:
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>
- Till - Housework
- To take care of - Journalist
- To write for - Sick
2. Grammar:
Review : The simple present tense.
III. Technique:
Explanation, using pictures, communicative.
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.
V. Procedure:
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up:
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare
- Ask Ss to find out the words about the jobs.
- Remark and lead in new lesson.
2. New lesson:
a) Lis ten. Then pratice with a partner.
- Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book.
- Introduce the situation of the dialogue then ask Ss
to guess what Hoa’s parents do.
- Explain some new words.
+ Countryside(n) :
+ To grow (v) :
+ To raise (v) :
+ Cattle (n) :
+ Till (adv) :
+ Housework (n) :
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually.
- Correct their pronunciation.
- Play the tape for Ss 2 times.
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of
the class.
* Now answer:
- Have Ss work in pairs.
- Have them play a game : Lucky numbers.
1) What does Hoa’s father do?
2) Where does he work?
3) LN
4) What is her mother’s job?
5) What does her mother do everyday?
6) LN
- Greetings.
- Play a game in 2 groups.
- Find out the jobs.
- Listen.
- Look at the picture .
- Listen and guess.
- Listen and write.
- Guess the meanings.
- Read new words in chorus
and individually.
- Listen to the tape.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice reading in front of the
class.
- Work in pairs.
- Play a game.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>
7) Are they happy?
8) How old is Hoa’s sister?
- Remark.
- Ask Ss to write down the answers in the
notebooks.
b) Read.
- Ask Ss to look at 3 pictures in the book and guess
what they do.
- Call on some Ss to tell about their jobs.
- Correct and give the correct answer, then
introduce some new words:
+ To take care of = To look after
+ To write for (v)
+ Journalist (n):
+ Sick (adj) = ill
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually.
- Ask them to play a game : Rub out and remember.
- Have Ss read the text about Lan’s family in silent.
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.
- Correct the pronunciation.
* Now practice with a partner.
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about
Lan’s family.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.
- Correct and give the correct answers:
+ Her father is a doctor. He works in a hospital.
+ Her mother is a teacher. She teaches in a primary
school.
+ Her brother is a journalist. He writes for a HN
newspaper.
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about
their family.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.
- Remark.
3. Consolidation:
- Have Ss write a short passage about their family.
- Ask them to exchange the writing with the partner.
- Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of
the class.
4. Home work:
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for
each. – Prepare part B3,4
- Do exercise unit 3 in Bai tap thuc hanh
- Write the answers.
- Look at 3 pictures in the book.
- Tell about the jobs.
- Listen and write.
- Read new words .
- Play a game.
- Read in silent.
- Read aloud.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Listen and write.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice.
- Write a short passage.
- Exchange the writing.
- Read aloud.
- Write homework.
WEEK 6 :
Preparing date : Thursday, October 4th 2008
Period 16:
UNIT 3 : AT HOME
Lesson 4: B – Hoa’s Family ( B3,4 )
I. The aims:
After the lesson, Ss will know the work of each job, and listen to the tape in order
to know the information then complete the forms.
II. Language content:
1. Vocabulary :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>
2. Grammar:
Review : the present simple tense.
Skill : Listening.
III. Technique:
Eliciting, communicative.
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, tape , cassette, sub- board.
V. Procedure:
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up:
- Greetings.
- Ask Ss some questions about their families, such
as: What does your father do?
Where does he work?
What does your mother do?
Do you have any brothers / sisters?
How old is he/ she?
……
- Remark and give mark.
2. New activities.
a) Match these half- sentences.
- Exlpain the aim of the exercise and ask Ss to do.
- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.
- Call on some Ss to read the completed sentences
in front of the class.
- Correct and give the correct answers:
+ A farmer works on a farm.
+ A doctor takes care of sick people.
+ A journalist writes for a newspaper.
+ A teacher teaches in a school.
- Ask Ss to copy down.
b) Listen, complete these forms for the three
people on the tape.
- Ask Ss to look at the form in the books.
- Have Ss guess the information of three people.
Open prediction
- Call on some groups to give their predictions.
- Play the tape for Ss 2 times to check their
prediction.
- Ask Ss to fill in the forms.
- Call on some Ss to give the results in front of the
class.
- Play the tape again for Ss to check.
- Correct and give the correct answers:
- Greetings.
- Answer T’s questions.
- Write new lesson.
- Listen and do exercise.
- Exchange the result with the
partner.
- Read completed sentences.
- Listen and copy.
- Look at the forms.
- Guess the information.
- Give the prediction.
- Listen to the tape and check.
- Fill in the forms.
- Listen again and check.
- Copy down.
Name Age Job Place of work
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>
- Ask Ss to use the inform mation about 3 people
then ask and answer.
- Make EX:
+ What is his name? => His name’s Tom.
+ How old is he? => He is 26.
+ What does he do?=> He’s a teacher.
+ Where does he work?=> He works at a high
school.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistakes.
3. Consolidation:
- Have Ss write about 3 people in the forms.
- Ask Ss to exchange the writings with the
partners.
- call on some Ss to read in front of the class.
4. Homework:
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 16,17 in workbook.
- Prepare part B5,6
- Work in pairs.
- Listen.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Write about 3 people.
- Exchange the writing.
- Read aloud.
- Write homework.
Preparing date : Friday, October 5th 2008
Period 17:
UNIT 3 : AT HOME
Lesson 5 : B – Hoa’s Family ( B5,6)
I. The aims:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use comparatives and superatives of
irregular adjectives and long adjectives . They can use them fluently and apply in the
life.
II. Language content:
1. Vocabulary:
- Apartment - Furnished
- Advice - Suitable
- Empty - Good=> better => the best
2. Grammar:
Structures: - S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2
- S + tobe + the most + adj.
III. Technique:
Explanation, pairwork, using pictures, communicative.
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.
V. Procedure:
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up:
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game : Guess the jobs.
+ You go to this person when you have a
toothache.
+ This person writes for a newspaper or magazine.
- Greetings.
- Play a game:
+ Dentist.
+ Journalist
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>
+ Before a house is built , this person draws the
plan for it.
+ This person grows vegetables and raises cattle.
….
- Remark and give marks.
2. New activities:
a) Listen and read:
- Introduce the content of the lesson to Ss .
- Explain some new words:
+ Apartment (n)= Flat .
+ Advice (n) :
+ Empty (adj) >< Full
+ Furnished ( adj) :
+ Suitable (adj) :
+ Good => better=> the best
Structures:
+ Comparatives of long adjectives
S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2
EX: She is more beautiful than her sister.
+ Superlatives of long adjectives:
S + tobe + the most + adj .
EX: He is the most intelligent.
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape.
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front
of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find the
answers for the questions.
- Have Ss work in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct and give the answer key:
a. The one at number 27
b. The one at number 79
c. The one at number 79
d. The one at number 27.
The most suitable apartment is the smallest but it
is the newest of the three apartments. It has two
bedrooms, a large modern bathroom and a kitchen.
b) Write.
- Introduce the situation of the lesson.
- Ask Ss to read the letter .
- Have Ss use the given words in the box in order
to complete the letter.
- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.
- Call on some Ss to read the completed letter
aloud.
- Correct and give the correct answer.
- Ask Ss to copy the letter in the notebooks.
3. Consolidation.
- Ask Ss to look at the remember and read .
- Call on some Ss to read aloud.
- Have Ss make sentences with them.
4. Homework:
+ Architect
+ Farmer
- Write new lesson.
- Listen.
- Listen and write.
- Guess the meanings .
- Read in chorus and
individually.
- Make sentences.
- Listen to the tape.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice reading .
- Find the answers .
- Work in pairs.
- Practice asking and answering.
- Listen and copy.
- Listen.
- Read the letter.
- Complete the letter.
- Exchange the result with the
partner.
- Read the letter aloud.
- Copy the letter in the
notebooks.
- Read .
- Make sentences.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>
- Learn by heart new words and structures by
making sentences with them.
- Do exercises 2,3 at page 16,17 in workbook.
- Prepare language focus 1.
- Write homework.
Preparing date : Friday, October 5th 2008
Period 18:
Language focus 1
I. The aims:
Ss do exercises in order to review the structures and grammar which they have
been learnt from unit 1 to unit 3 . From that they will use them fluently and apply
them in the life.
II. Language content:
- Present simple tense.
- Future simple tense.
- Ordinal numbers.
- Comparatives and superlatives.
- Prepositions of place.
- Occupations.
III. Techhnique :
Eliciting, using pictures, pairwork, groupwork.
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, pictures, sub-board.
V. Procedure:
T’s activities Ss’ activities
1. Warm up:
- Greetings.
- Ask Ss some questions about their health,
families.
2. Consolidation and practice:
(1) Present simple tense;
- Ask Ss to repeat the use of the present simple
tense.
- Ask them to do exercise 1: Complete the passage
using the verbs in brackets.
- Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.
- Call on some Ss to read aloud.
- Correct and give the correct answers.
(2) Future simple tense:
- Have Ss play a game: Noughts and crosses
EX: He will go to the post office.
He won’t call Ba.
- Remark.
(3) Ordinal numbers;
- Ask Ss to write the correct ordinal numbers.
- Call on 2 Ss to go to the board and write.
- Greetings.
- Answer T’s questions.
- Repeat aloud.
- Do exercise.
- Exchange the result with the
partner.
- Read aloud.
- Play a game.
Make sentences.
- Write ordinal numbers.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>
- Correct if necessary.
(4) Prepositions:
- Have Ss look at the pictures in the book and use
the prepositions in the box to write the positions of
the cat.
- Call on some Ss to speak aloud.
- Correct and give the correct answers;
a. It’s in front of the chair.
c. It’s behind the TV.
d. It’s next to the bookshelf.
e. It’s on the couch.
(5) Adjectives:
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and use the
adjectives in the box to make sentences about
comparatives and superlatives.
- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write
down.
- Correct and give the correct answers:
a) A is a cheap toy. B is cheaper. C is the cheapest.
b) A is an expensive dress. B is more expensive.
C is the most expensive.
…….
(6) Occupations:
- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers.
1. LN
2. He fights fires. He is very brave. What is his
job?
3. She works in a school. She teaches students.
what is her job?
4. He lives in the countryside. He grows
vegetables and raises cattle. What’s his job?
5. LN.
6. She works in a hospital. She makes people well.
What’s her job?
7. He works in a factory. He repairs machines .
What’s his job?
8. LN
(7) Is there a….?/ Are there any…?
- Have Ss look at the picture then complete the
sentences.
- Have Ss work in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct if necessary.
- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks.
(8) Question words:
- Ask Ss to look at the form then ask and answer
the information about Pham Trung Hung.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct and ask them to write down.
3. Further practice:
- Give some cues then ask Ss to make sentences.
+ Sydney / big / Australia.
+ Tokyo / expensive / World.
- Go to the board and write.
- Look at the pictures carefully
and write.
- Speak aloud.
- Copy.
- Make sentences.
- Go to the board and write.
- Copy down.
- Play a game in 2 groups.
- Complete the sentences.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Copy down.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice asking and answering.
- Write.
- Do exercise.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>
+ He / good student / class.
4. Consoidation:
5. Homework:
- Do test yourself in workbook.
- Review for the test. - Write homework.
WEEK 7:
Preparing date: Tuesday, October 9th 2008
Period 19:
English written test
I. The aims:
The students will know how to apply their knowledge to do the test well, from the
test the teacher will know each student and class’s knowledge and have the method to
teach.
II. Preparing :
- Teacher : prepare a written test
- Students: Review
III. Test
A. Even test :
Question I: Choose the best answers to complete the sentences .(1,5ps)
1. We will ………our old friend next Sunday.
A. to meet B. meeting C. meet
2. Her birthday is ………Friday, August 20th
A. at B. in C. on
3. This dress is the …………..expensive of the four dresses
A. best B. more C. most
4. My father take care ……….sick children.
A. of B. about C. in
5. Would you like …………the movie with me?
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>
A. see B. to see C. seeing
6. Which is the most beautiful apartment?
A. The smallest one B. the smaller one C. a small one
Question II: Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. ( 2ps)
1. Mr Hung ( be ) ………….a doctor. He ( work ) ……….in a hospital.
Everyday he ( catch)……….the bus to work.
2. We ( not play )………soccer tomorrow, we ( visit ) ……….
our old friends.
3. What your father ( do ) ………now?
He ( watch ) ………TV in the living room.
4. She’d like ( come ) ………..with us.
Question III: Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given. (2ps)
1. There is a sink, a tub and a shower in the bathroom.
=> The bathroom ……….
2. The picture is very expensive.
=> What ……….
3. No houses on the street are older than my house.
=> My house ……….
4. She rides a bike to school everyday.
=> She goes ………..
Question IV: Read the passage then answer the questions. ( 2,5ps)
I am Hoa . I live with my parents in a small town in Hanoi. My parents are
workers, and they work in a factory. Everyday, they go to work to the factory early in
the morning and come back late in the afternoon. They go to work by bus. My school
is not far from my house so I often go to school on foot. I often do the housework to
help my parents. The next Sunday will be my thirteenth birthday. I’ll invite some of
my classmates to join in my birthday party at my house.
1. Where does Hoa live ? ………
2. How do Hoa’s parents go to work? ………
3. Why does Hoa go to school on foot? ……….
4. How old will she be next Sunday? ………
5. What will she invite some of her classmates to do ?
………
Question V: Listen carefully , then complete this form.(2ps)
Name :………
Date of birth :………
Address : ……….
Telephone number :……….
B. Odd test:
Question I: Complete the sentence with the appropriate form of the word in bracket.
(1,5ps)
1. Have you got a ………..machine? ( wash)
2. What a ………party!( bore)
3. What’s the ………mountain in the world? (high)
4. My uncle is a ………( drive )
5. My birthday is on October ………( twenty)
6. Hoa is writing many ……….cards for her birthday party.( invite)
Question II: Supply the correct form of the verb in bracket. ( 2ps)
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>
1. What you ( read ) ……….right now?
I ( read ) ………a grammar book.
2. My sister always ( brush ) ………her teeth after meal.
3. You ( be )………..in class tomorrow? – Yes , I will.
4. Anna ( sit ) ……….at her desk. She ( not do )………..
her homework. She ( write ) ………a letter to her parents.
5. The children enjoy ( watch ) ……….cartoons on TV very much.
Question III: Rewrite these sentences, beginning with the words given.( 2ps)
1. Let’s go to the post office!
=> What ………..
2. We live at 35 Ly Thuong Kiet street.
=> Our ………..
3. There are forty – five students in his class.
=> His class ………
4. Nam is the tallest student in my class.
=> No one ……….
Question IV: Read the passage then answer the questions (2,5ps)
I’m Nga. I live at 24 Nguyen Tri Phuong street with my parents and two brothers.
My telephone number is 8 290 374 . On my next birthday , July 1st , I will have a
small party for my birthday. I will invite some of my friends to my house. We will eat
cakes and sweets and we will have a lot of fun. The party will start at five and finish at
nine.
1. Where does Nga live? ………
2. How many people are there in her family? ……….
3. When is her birthday? ………
4. How long will the party last?………..
5. What will they do at her birthday party?
……….
Question V: Listen carefully, then complete this form. (2ps)
Name :………
Date of birth: ………
Address :………..
Telephone number :………. .
IV. Collect the test.
V. Homework:
- Do unit 3 in Bai tap thuc hanh
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>
Preparing date : Tuesday, October 9th 2008
Period 20:
Correcting the test
I. The aims :
After the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the common mistakes and their
knowledge , from that they will know how to improve their knowledge of English.
II. Teaching aids :
Test papers, chalk, board.
III. Procedure:
1. Warm up :
- Greetings.
- Ask Ss some questions .
2. Correcting the test:
a) Remark the good and bad of the test and correct common mistakes.
b) Deliver the test papers and give the correct answers:
A. Even test
Question I: Each correct sentence gives 0,25.
1. b 2. c 3. c 4. a 5. b 6. a
Question II: Each correct verb gives 0,25
1. is ; works ; catches.
2. won’t play; will visit.
3. is your father doing ; is watching.
4. to come.
Question III: Each correct sentence gives 0,5.
1. The bathroom has a sink, a tub and a shower.
2. What an expensive picture!
3. My house is the oldest on the street.
4. She goes to school by bikeeveryday.
Question IV: Each correct answer has 0,5
1. She lives in a small town near Hanoi.
2. They go to work by bus.
3. Because her school is not far from her house.
4. She will be 13.
5. She will invite them to join in her birthday party.
Question V: Each correct information has 0,5.
Name : Nguyen Thanh Trung
Date of birth : May 25th
Address : Thirty- five Nguyen Trai street
Telephone number : 8 253 764.
* Tape cript :
Hi, my full name is Nguyen Thanh Trung, I live with my parents at thirty- five
Nguyen Trai street. I’ll be thirteen on May 25th . I’ll invite some friends to my
birthday party at my house. My telephone number is 8 253 764
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>
B. Odd test:
Question I: Each correct word has 0,25.
1. washing 2. boring 3. highest 4. driver 5. twentieth 6. invitation
Question II: Each correct verb has 0,25.
1. are you reading ; - am reading 2. brushes
3. Will you be 4. is sitting - isn’t doing - is writing
5. watching
Question III: Each correct sentence has 0,5.
1. What about going to the post office?
2. Our address is 35 Ly Thuong Kiet street.
3. His class has forty- five students.
4. No one in my class is taller than Nam.
Question IV: Each correct answer has 0,5.
1. She lives at 24 Nguyen Tri Phuong street.
2. There are 5 people in her family.
3. Her birthday is on July 1st.
4. The party will last from five to nine.
5. They will eat cakes and sweets and they will have a lot of fun.
Question V:
The same even test.
3. Remark:
4. Homework: Prepare unit 4 – A1,2,3
Preparing date : Wednesday, October 10th 2008
Period 21:
UNIT 4 : AT SCHOOL
Lesson 1: A – Schedules ( A1,2,3 )
I. The aims :
The students will review the way of speaking the time and some subjects at
school. Ss will practice listening for details about subjects and time.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>
Review : - The simple present tense.
- Vocabulary about subjects at school.
III. Technique:
Eliciting, pairwork, communicative.
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook, tape, cassette, clock, sub- board.
V. Procedure:
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings.
- Have ss play a game : Slap the board
- Remark and demonstrate the group which wins the
game.
2. New activities:
a) Listen and repeat:
- Ask Ss to repeat the questions about asking the
time.
- Have Ss look at the clocks in the book.
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape.
- Have Ss read after the tape.
- Call on some Ss to read aloud.
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the
time.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class
( exchange the roles)
- remark.
b) Answer about you.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about
them.
- Make model with a student:
T: What time do you get up?
S : I get up at 6 o’clock.
T: What time do classes start?
S : They start at 7 o’ clock.
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.
- Remark and ask them to write the answers in the
notebooks.
c) Listen and write. Complete the schedule.
- Ask Ss to look at the schedule then explain the aim
of the exercise.
- Have Ss guess the missing subjects and time.
- Call on some Ss to give their prediction.
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and compare their
prediction.
- Play the tape again and ask Ss to write the missing
- Greetings.
- Play a game in 2 groups.
- Write new lesson.
- Give the questions.
- Look at the clocks in the
book.
- Listen to the tape.
- Read after the tape.
- Read aloud.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Work in pairs.
- Listen .
- Practice in front of the class.
- Write down.
- Listen.
- Guess.
- Give the prediction.
- Listen to the tape and check.
- Listen to the tape and write.
Math Geography
Physics <sub>Music</sub> <sub>English</sub>
Physical
education
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>
subjects and time.
- Have Ss exchange the results with the partners.
- Play the tape again for Ss to check the results.
- Ask Ss to give the answers.
- Correct and give the correct answer.
- Ask Ss to copy down.
Friday
7:00 7:50 8:40 9:40 10:30
English Georaphy Music Physics History
Saturday
1:00 2:40 3:40 4:30
Physical education Math English Physics
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the
time of the subjects on Friday and Saturday .
EX: What time do they have English on Friday ?
They have English at 7:00
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.
- Correct the mistakes if necessary.
3. Consolidation:
- Repeat the way of speaking the times and subjects
at school.
4. Homework:- Doexercise 1,2 in workbook.
- Prepare part 4,5.
- Exchange the results.
- Listen again and check.
- Give the answer.
- Listen and write.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Speak aloud.
- Write homework.
WEEK 8:
Preparing date: Wednesday, October 18th 2008
Period 22:
UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL
Lesson 2: A – Schedules ( A4,5)
I. The aims:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can speak to each other about the schedule and
practice the present continuous tense.
II. Language content:
- Review: + Vocabulary about subjects at school.
+ The present continuous tense
III. Technique:
Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures.
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, pictures, tape, cassette.
V. Procedure:
Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities
1. Warm up:
- Greetings.
- Have Ss play a game: Networks - Greetings.- Play a game in 2 groups.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>
- Call on 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and
write down.
- Remark.
2. New activities:
a. Look at the pictures. Ask and answer questions
- Ask Ss to look at 6 pictures carefully and call the
names of these subject
- Explain new word :
Physical education (n)
- Call on some students to speak about the pictures
- Correc and give the correct answers
+ Physics + music
+ Geography + math
+ English + Physical education
- Have Ss look at the clocks and tell the time
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about
these people
- Make model with a student
T : What is lan studying ?
S : She is studyng physics
T : What time does Lan/she have her physics class ?
S : She has her physics class at 8:40
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class
- Correct if necessary
- Ask Ss to write into the notebooks.
b. Listen and read
- Introduce the dialogue to Ss
- Ask Ss some questions about their schedules
- Ask Ss to guess what subjects Hoa and Thu have
on Thursday
- Call on some Ss to give the answers
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape
then check their guess
- Call on some Ss to give the answers
- Correct and give the correct answers:
English , math , geography, physical education,
music
- Play the tape for Ss then explain the structure
+ When do you have English ?
I have English classes on Wednesday and Thursday
+ What is your favorite subject ?
I like math
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of
the class
- Correct their pronunciation
- Ask Ss to answer some questions about the
dialogue
+ When does Thu have E classes ?
+ What time do they start ?
+ What orther classes does Thu have on Thursday ?
+ What ‘s Thu’s favorite subject ?
Why ?
+ What ‘s Hoa’s favorite subject ?
Why ?
- Go to the board and write.
- Look at the picture crafully
- Speaks about the pictures
- Tell the time of each clock
- Work in pairs
- Listen carefully
- Practice in front of the class
- Write down.
- Listen.
- Answer the questions.
- Guess.
- Give the answers.
- Look at the books and listen
to the tape.
- Give the answers.
- Listen.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Answer the questions.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>
- Correct the mistakes if necessary
- Have Ss write their scheducles in the notebooks
- Introduce some more subject to Ss
+ Civic education (n) : GDCD
+ Fine arts (n) : MÜ thuËt
+ Biology (n) : Sinh häc
+ Chemistry (N) : Ho¸ häc
+ Technology (n) : C«ng nghƯ
+ Elective subject : M«n tù chän
- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering
about their schedule
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class
- Correct the mistakes
3. Consolidation:
- Repeat the subjects at school and structures:
When do we have……….?
What is your favorite subject?
4. Homework:
- Learn by heart new words and structures.
- Write the schdules in the exercise book.
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 22& 23 in workbook.
- Write schedules in the
notebook.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice speaking in front of
the class.
- Listen carefully.
- Write homework.
Preparing date: Thursday, October 18th 2008
Period 23:
Unit 4 At school
Lesson 3 A_Schedules (6,7)
I. The aims :
By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to speak about the difference
between two persons or two things. The students will know about the difference
betweet schools in the USA and Viet Nam. Practice reading skill
II. Language contnet :
1. Vocabulary:
- Uniform (n) - A 20-minute break (n)
- Cafeteria (n) - Snack (n)
- Popular (adj) - After - school activity (n)
2. Grammar
Structure : Tobe different form….
Reciew: the present simple tense
III. Technique :
Brainstorming , Asking and answerning , groupwork.
IV. Teaching aids :
Text book , tape , cassette , sub-board
V. Procedure :
T’s activities Ss’activities
1. Warm up
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>
- Greetings
- Ask Ss some questions
+ How many classes do you have today ?
+ What are they ?
+ What ‘s your favorite subject ?
+ When do you have English ?
+ What time do they start ?
Remark and give marks
2. New activites
a.Read
*Pre- reading :
- Ask Ss some questions in order to load in new
lesson :
+ Which country has capital city as Washington
DC ?
+ What do you think about the USA?
“Today we ‘ll learn about schools in the USA ,
before reading the text I ‘ll explain some new words
for you”
+ School uniform (n) : §ång phơc
+ A_20_minute break : Giờ giải lao 20
+ Cafeteria (n) : Quán ¨n tù phơc vơ
+ Snack (n) : Mãn ¨n nhĐ
+ Popular (adj) >< unpopular
+ After_school activity : Hoạt động sau giờ học
* Checking technique:
Rub out and remember
- Have Ss do exercise : True or False ( in the text
book )
< using sub_board>
- Ask Ss to guess the information
- Call on some represintatives to give their
predicitions in front of the class
*While_reading :
- Ask Ss to look at the text and listen to the tape their
check their predictions
- Call on some Ss to give their answers
- Correct on give the correct answers
a: T b : F c : F d : T e : F f : F
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.
Correct their pronuniation
*Post-reading :
- Ask Ss to discuss in groups about the difference
between shools in the USA and school in Vnam
- Call on some represontatives to demonstrate their
ideas
- Summarize the ideas of the groups
- Remark
b. Play with words
- Play the tape for Ss
- Explain some new words
+ Home economics
+ The word changes
+ Rivers and mountains ranges
+ Several
- Greetings.
- Answer T’S questions
I have…..
They are…..
I like…..
I have……
They start at …
- Write new lesson
- Answer T’s question
- USA
< The students ca answer
their opinions in V Namese>
- Listen carefully
- Guess the meanings
- Read new words in churs
and individually their copy
down
- Play a game
- Do exercise in groups
- Give the prediction
- Listen to the tape & check
the prediction
- Give the answers
- Copy down
- Read the text aloud
- Work in groups
- Demonstrate their ideas
- Listen
- Listen to the tape
- Read in chours and
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>
- Play the tape
- Call on some Ss to read after the tape
- Call on some Ss to read aloud
3. Consolidation
- Repeat the details about the schools in the USA
and VN
- Repeat new words and structures
4. Homework
- Learn by heart new words & structure by making
sentences with them
- Make sentences with the part remember.
- Do exercise 4 at page 23 in workbook
- Prepare B1,2.
- Read after the tape
- Read loudly
- Listen and remember
- Write home work
Preparing date: Friday, October 19th 2008
Period 24 :
Unit Four : At school
Lesson 4 : B- The library <1,2>
I. The aims :
By the end of the lesson , the students will read the text to understand the
details and practice library vocabulary & prepositions of positions
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Rack (n) - Shelf (n) Shelves
- Science books (n) - Dictionary (n)
- Chemistry (n) - Biology (n)
- Literature in Viet names(n) - Reader(n)
- Reference book (n) - Novel (n)
- At the back of (pre)
2. Grammar :
The structure : - Where can I find the math books, please?
- Do you have newspapers and magazines here?
Review : The present simple tense :
III. Technique :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>
IV. Teaching aids
Text book , tape , cassette, pictures.
V. Procedure :
T’s activities Ss’activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings
- Have Ss play a game : Jumbled words
Luratitere Hisplesc
Torishy Bhygrageo
Spenawpes
- Have students work in groups
- Call on 2 representatives to go to the board and
write down
- Correct & remark
2. New activities:
a. Listen and read:
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess
- Ask Ss some questions
+ What is it in the picture ?
+ Where do you usually see it ?
Load in new lesson
+ Does your school have the library ?
+ What is the usefulness of library ?
+ What do you usually do when you go to the
library ?
+ Who can help you find the books in the library ?
Explain some new words :
+ Rack (n): Gi¸, kƯ
+ Shelf (n) Shelves : Gi¸ s¸ch
+ Science books : S¸ch khoa häc
+ Dictionary (n) : tõ ®iĨn
+ Novel : tiĨu thut
+ Reference books : Sách tham khảo
+ At the back of : phía đằng sau
*Checking technique :
- Ask Ss to play a game
Slap the board
< new words are written in the sub_road )
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape
then do exercise :
Grid :
The library
Openning time :
Books on the left:
Books on the right:
Books in the English:
Closing time:
- Call on some Ss to go to the board and complete
the table
- Correct and give the correct answer
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of
the class
- Correct their pronunciation
- Greetings
- Play a game
- Work in groups
- 2 students go to the board &
write
- Look at the picture carefully
- Listen and answer
Yes, it does
( Ss can answer the questions in
Vnamese )
- Guess their meanings, read
new words in chours and
individually
- Copy down in their notebooks
- Play game
- Look at the book and listen to
the tape
- Complete the table
- Go to the board and write
- Work in pairs
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>
- Ask Ss to look at the questions in the books then
work in pairs
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions
in front of the class
- Correct the mistake if necessary
b.Listen then practice with a partner
- Introduce new lesson
- Play the tape for Ss and ask them to look at the
books
- Explain some structures :
+ Where can I find the math books, please
+ Do you have magazines here ?
new spapers
They are on the shelves on the left / right
- Ask Ss to make questions and answers
- Correct the mistakes if necessary
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of
the class
- Correct their pronunciation
- Ask Ss to look at part B1 again then make the
similar dialogue
- Have Ss work in pairs
- Call on some pairs to make their dialogues in front
of the class
Ex :
H : Good morning
L : Good morning. Can I help you ?
H : Yes , where can I find the books in English?
L : They are at the back of the library
H : Do you have math and biology books here?
L : Yes, they have on the shelves on the left
H : Thank you very much
L : You are welcome.
3. Consolidation:
- Ask Ss to write sentences about their school
library , using the library vocabulary
- Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of
the class
- Remark
4. Home work
- Learn by heart new words by making sentences
with them
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 24 in work book
- Prepare part 3,4,5
- Ask and answer loud
a. Where are the magazines
They are on the racks
b. Where are the news spapers
They are on the racks
………
- Listen to the teacher
- Listen to the tape
- Listen and write down
- Make questions & answers
- Work in pairs
- Read the dialogue aloud
- Look at B1 again
- Work in pairs
- Some pairs make dialogues
- Write about the school library
- Read loudly
- Write home work
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>
WEEK 9:
Preparing date : Wednesday, October 24th 2008
Period 25 :
Unit 4 : At school
<b>Lesson 5 : B- The library <3,4,5,remember></b>
I. The aims :
By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to know the information
about one of the world’s largest libraries thoughe the text. They will review the
prepositions of position and library vocabulary.
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary
- To receive (v) - To contain (v)
- Employee (n) - Congress (n)
2. Grammar :
- The present simple tense.
- Skill : Listeing, reading.
III. Technique :
Explaination , asking and answering , work in pairs and groups
IV. Teaching aids
Text book , tape, cassette, pictures if have
V. Procedure :
T’s activities Ss’ activities
1. Warm up
- Greetings
- Have Ss play a game
Noughts and Crosses
- Make example :
S1 : Where are the science books ?
S2 : They are on the sheklves on the right
- Remark and lead in new lesson
2. New activities
a. Listen : Where are they ?
- Ask Ss to look at the chart in the library
- Have Ss work in groups guessing the positions of
the books in the library.
- Call on some representatives to speak about the
pisitions of books
- Play the tape for Ss and ask them ti check their
predictions <2times>
- Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the
class
- Play the tape again and check the answer
- Give the correct answer :
- Greetings
- Play a game
- Play game in 2 groups
( Make questions and answers)
- Look at the chart carefully
- Work in groups to discuss
the posotions
- Demonstrate their predictions
- Listen to the tape
- Give the results
- Listen to the tape
- Copy down
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>
1. Study
2. Science + math
3: Geography
4 + 5 : Newspapers and magazines
6+7 : English
8, Librarian’s desk
- Ask Ss to compare their predictions
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the
positions of books
- Correct the mistakes
b. Read then answer
* Pre- reading
- Introduce the lesson then explain some new words
+ To reccive (v) : NhËn
+ Comgress (n) : Quèc héi
+ To contain (v) : bao gåm
+ Employee (n) : nhân viên
Checking technique : Rub out and remember
- Ask Ss to do exerise : T or F prediction
1. The library of Congress is in New york
2. It receives copies of all E books
3. There are over 100 million books in this
library
4. The shelves are about 300 km long.
5. 5.000 people work in the library
- Ask some representatives to give their predictions
*While-reading
- Ask Ss to look at the text, read in silent then check
their predictions
- Call on some Ss to give the answer
1 - F 2 - F 3 - T 4 – F 5 - T
- Call on some students read the text in front of the
class
- Correct their pronunciations
- Ask Ss to look at the text again then find out the
answers for the question
- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers < The
questions in the book >
1 – d
2 - Ln
3 – e
4 – b
5 – LN
6 – a
7 – c
- Ask Ss to write the answers in their notebooks
* Post_reading
- Ask Ss to compare their school library with the
library of Conguss
- Ask them to write the sentences
Ex : My school library in smaller than the library of
Congress
- Compare the predictions
- Work in pairs
S1 : Where are E books ?
S2 : They are on the shelves
behind the librarian’s desk
- Listen carefully
- Listen and copy down
- Guess meanings read new
words in chours and
individually
- Work in groups to predict
- Give the predictions
- Read the text in silent and
check the predictions
- Give the answers
- Read the text aloud
- Read the text and find the
answers
- Play a game in groups
answer the questions
- Write the answers
- Compare 2 librarys
- Write down
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>
<5> Play with words :
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the teacher
- Ask Ss to read after the teacher
- Explain some new words :
+ To forget (v) :
+ Rocket (n) :
+ Space (n) :
+ Adveture (n) :
- Call on some Ss to read the poem aloud
- Correct their pronunciation
3. Consolation :
- Ask Ss look at the remember and use the phrases of
prepositions and pronouns to make sentences.
4. Home work :
- Learn by herart new works by writing 3 lines for
each
- Do exercise 4 at page 26 in work book
- Prepare Unit 5 part A1,2.
- Listen
- Read after the teacher
- Listen and write down
- Read aloud.
- Listen carefully and make
sentences.
- Write home work
Preparing date: Thursday, October 25th 2008.
Period 26
Unit 5 : Work and play
Lesson 1 : A - In class ( A1,2)
I. The aims
After the lesson, the students will be able to describe the work of a student at
school and Ba’s activities at school and at home . They use the present simple tense to
talk about school subject
II. Language content
1. Vocabulary :
- To learn about - Electronics
- To use how to use - To repair = to fix
- To be omterested in - Household appliances
- A map (n) - Drawing.
- An experiment (n) - Artist
- Computer science (n) - To be good at
2. Grammar :
Review the present simple tense.
III. Technique :
Explaination , ask and answer
Students work in pairs / in groups
IV. Teaching aids
Text book , cassette , tape , pictures
V. Procedure
T’s activities Ss’ activities
1. Warm up :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>
- Greetings
- Ask Ss some questions
+ How many days a week do you go to school ?
+ What time do you go to school ?
+ What time do classes start ?
+ How many subjects do you learn ?
+ What is your favorite subject ?
Remark then lead in new lesson
2. New activities:
a. Listen and read:
- Introduce the lesson,then explain some new words
+to learn about (v)
+to use how touse
+computer science(n):tin hoc
+to be interested in :
+A map(n):
+ An experiment:
-checking techrique:
What and WHERE
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape(2
times)
- Have Ss read the text in silent
- Call on some students to read the text aloud
- Correct their pronunciation.
- ask Ss to read the text again then fill in the grids
- Ask Ss to exchange the results with their partners
- Call on one student to go to the board and write
down
- Correct the mistake and give the correct answer
+ To learn how to use a computer
+ To study maps and learn how about different
countries
+ To do some experiments
- Have Ss read the question and answer in the book
- Ask Ss to make 5 questions and answers about
Mai
- Have Ss work in pairs
- Call on some pairs to askand answer in front of
the class
- Correct the mistakes if necessary
- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering
about themselves,using the questions given
1)What time do your class start?
2) What do you learn at school?
3) What do you do in your computer science class?
4) What do you study in your geography class?
5) What do you do in your last lesson?
6)What time do your classes end?
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of
- Greetings
- Answer T’s questions
- Listen carefully
- guess meanings,read new
words in chorus and
individually,then copy down in
the notebooks
- Play game
- Look at the books and listen to
the tape
- Read in silent
- Read the text aloud
- Complete the grids
- Do individually
- Exchange the results
- One students go to the board
and writes
- Write down
- Read aloud
- make questions & answer
- Work in pairs
- Practice in front of the class
- Work in pairs
- Practice aloud
Classes What do to
Computer science
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>
the class
- Ask Ss to based on the questions to write a
passage
- Call on some student to read their writing
Aloud
- Remark
b. Read, then answer the questions.
- Have Ss look at 2 pictures and answer the
questions
This is Ba. What is he doing ?
Introduce some new words :
+ Electronics (n) : §iƯn tư
+ House hold appliances : các vật dụng trong gia
đình
+ To repair (v) : sưa ch÷a
+ To be good at : giái vỊ….
+ Drawing (n) : b¶n vÏ
+ Artist (n) : Häa sÜ
+ To enjoy (v) : yªu thÝch
- Correct their pronunciation
- Checking technique : Rub out and remember
- Have Ss do exercise : T or F predicition
1/ Ba enjoys his school very much
2/ His favorite subject is Electronics
3/ In this class he does some experiments
4/ He is’nt good at fixing things
5/ He can help his parents at home
6/ He never goes to art club
- Have Ss work in groups
- Call on some representatives to give their
predictions
- Ask Ss to read the text and check their predictions
- Cal on some students to give the answers on front
of the class
- Correct and give the correct answers
1 – T 2 – T 3 – F 5 – T 6 – F
- Call on some Ss to read text aloud
- Correct their pronunciation
* Questions :
- Ask Ss to read the text again to find out the
answers for the questions
- Have Ss work in pairs
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer ion front of
the class
- Correct and give th answer key
a/ He likes Electionics best
b/ Yes , he does. He enjoys school very much
c/ He learns to repair house hold applicanes
d/ He will able to fix his own appliances
e/ Yes , he is . His drawings are very good
- About you :
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the
questions about them selves
- Write a passage
- read aloud
- Look at the picture and answer
the questions
<Students can answer the
questions in Vnamese if don’t
know >
P2 : He’s playing the guitar
- Guess the meanings read new
words in chorus and
individually
- Then copy down
- Play game
- Work in groups
- Give the prediction
- Read the text & check the
prediction
- Give the answers in front of
the class
- Copy down
- Read the text aloud
- Read the text again to find out
the answers
- Work in pairs
- Some pairs practice in front of
the class
- Copy down
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>
- Make model :
T : What do you do in your free time
S : I play soccer
T : What are you goot at ?
S : I am good at drawing
T : What is your favorite aubject ?
S : My favorite subject is fine Arts
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class
- Correct the mistakes if necessary
3. Consolidation:
- Ask Ss to make a survey:
Name Favorite subject Good at Fretime activity
Hoa
Nam
- Have Ss work in groups
- Call on some representatives to tellabout members
of their group.
- Remark.
4. Homework:
- learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for
each
- write the passage in the notebooks
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 27 in workbook
- Prepare A3,4
- Listen carefully
- Practice in front of the class
- Make a survey.
- Work in groups.
- Give the results.
- Write homework
Preparing date : Friday, October 26th 2008
Period 27 :
Unit 5 : Work and play
Lesson 2 : In class (3,4)
I. The aims
By the end of the class, Ss will be able to do a math question and they will
listen a passage to find out the information
II. Language contnet
1. Vocabulary :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>
2. Grammar
Review the present simple tense
III. Technique
Eleciting , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork
IV. Teaching aids
Textbook , cassette , tape
V. Procedure :
T’s activities Ss’ activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings
- Play a game : lucky numbers
1. What ‘s Ba ‘s favorite subject ?
2. Lucky number
3. Does Ba like other subject at school?
4. What does Ba learn to do in Electronics class ?
5. LN
6. Is Ba good at fixing things ?
7. What does Ba do in his freetime ?
8. LN
9. What’s your favorite subject ?
10.What do yo do in your freetime ?
- Remark
2. New activities
1. Read. Then answer
- Introduce the aims of the lesson : Read the dialogue
then find out the answer for the question
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in silent
- Explain some new words to Ss
+ To cost (v) : trị giá
+ Right (adj) : Đúng
+ Price (n) : gi¸
+ Proplem (n) : vấn đề
+ To erase (v) : xóa, tẩy
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and invidually
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of
the class
- Correct their pronunciation
- Ask Ss to read the question and find out the answers
- Call on some students to give the answers
- Correct then give the correct answer
One banana costs 600 dong
2. Listen then write correct letters next to names
- Introduce the aims of the lesson
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the names of
sbject
- Ask Ss to guess what subject Ba and Hoa do on
Saturday ?
- Call on some Ss to give then predictions
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and choose the right
- Greetings
- Play a game
- 2 groups take part in the
game
- Listen to the teacher
- Read in silent
- Read new words in chorus
and individually, then copy
down
- Work in pairs
- Read the dialogue aloud
- Read the question and find
the answer
- Give the answer
- Copy down
- Listen to the teacher
- Call the names of subjects
a/ Geography
b/ Physical education
c/ Computer science
d/ Technology
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>
subjects Ba and Hoa do on Saturday
- Play the tape again fod Ss and ask them to write the
letters next to the names
- Have Ss exchange the results with their parents
- Play the tape again for Ss to check their results
- Call on some Ss to give their answers
- Correct and give the correct answers
Ba : d,a,e
Hoa : c,b,e
- Have Ss answer the questions :
+ What subjects does Ba have on Saturday ?
+ What subjects does Hoa have on Saturday ?
3. Consolidation :
- Ask Ss some questions about themselves
+ What subjects do you like ?
+ When do you have math ?
+ Do you think math is difficult or easy ?
…….
4. Home work :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each
- Do exercise 3 at page 28 in workbook
- Prepare part 5,6,7
- Listen and write down
- Exchange the results
- Listen to the tape and check
- Give the answers
- Write down
- Answer T’s questions
- Answer T’s questions
- Write home work
WEEK 10:
Praparing date : Thursday, November 1st 2008
Period 28 :
Unit 5 : Work and play
Lesson 3 : A - Inclass (A5,6,7)
I. The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to speak about subjects at school, what
they study in each subject. They continue pratising reading skill
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Essay (n) - Past and present event
- Author (n) - Graph (n)
- Equation (n) - Globe (n)
- Caculator (n)
2. Grammar :
Reviw : The oresent simple tense
III. Technique :
Explaination , asking and answering , group work , pair work
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , sub_board
V. Procedure :
T’s activities Ss’activities
1. Warm up
- Greetings
- Have Ss play agame :
Hangman :
- Literature , History , English
- Remark
2. New activites
<5> Read
- Greetings
- Play a game
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>
- Introduce the lesson to Ss
- Ask Ss some questins such as ;
+How many subjects do you study at school ?
+What do you study in each subject ?
+Which Subject do you like / dislike ?
Why ?
- Explain some new words for Ss
+ essay (n)
+ past and present events (n)
+ author (n)
- Have Ss read the passage in silent
- Call on some Ss to read the passage in front of the
class
- Correct the pronunciation
- Make some questions then ask Ss to answer
+ What do you study in / literature ?
/ history ?
/ Physics ?
/ Geography ?
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the
content of the passage
- Correct the mistakes
- Have Ss look at the part of exercuse then explain
the aims of exercise to Ss
- Have Ss work in pairs reading and odding the
words which are not suitable with each subject
- Call on some students to give the answers
- Correct the mistakes then give the correct answers
+ Literature : paitings
+ History : baseball games
+ Science : Preposition
+ English : England
- Ask Ss some questions about the subjects
+ What do you study in literature ?
+ Do you learn to play baseball in history ?
- Have Ss put some more words in the subjects
- Remark
<6>Match each subject to the correct items
- Explain the aims of the exercuse
- Explain some new words to Ss
+ Graphs (n)
+ Equation (n)
+ Caculator (n)
+ Globe (n)
- Have Ss do exercise : Match each subject to the
correct items
- Have Ss exchange the result with their partner
- Call on some Ss to give the answers
- Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers
- Ask Ss some questions such as :
What do you do in the P.E class ?
What do you do in the Art class ?
What do you learn in the math class ?
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the
- Listen to the teacher
- Answer T’s questions
- Listen and write down
- Read the passage in silent
- Read the passage in front of
the class
- Answer T’s questions
- Work in pairs
- Listen to the teacher
- Do exercise in pairs
- Give the answers
- Copy down
- Answer T’s questions
- Put some more words in the
subjects
- Listen to the teacher
- Listen and write down
- Read in chorus and
individually
- Do exercise
- Exchange the result
- Give the answers
- Answer T’s questions
- Work in pairs
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>
questions
- Ask Ss to copy down the exercise
<7> Play with words
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the
teacher
- Have Ss read after the teacher
- Call on some students to read in front of the class
- Correct Ss’ pronunciation
3. Consolidation
- Have Ss repeat about the subjects which they
learnt
- Ask Ss to read the part remember aloud.
4. Home work
- Make sentences with part remember.
- Do exercise 4 at page 29 in work book
- Prepare part B1,2
- Copy down
- Listen to the teacher
- Read after the teacher
- Read in front of
- Repeat the subjects
- Write home work
Preparing date : Thursday, November 1st 2008
Period 29 :
Unit 5 : Work and play
Lesson 4 : B - It’s time for recess (B1,2)
I. The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to tell about activities at recess. They
will practice reading and listening skills
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- To chat (v) - To ring (v)
- To skip rope - Bell(n)
- Blind man’s bhaff - Marbles
- Catch (n) - Recess
2. Grammar :
Review : The present continuous tense :
III. Technique :
Eleciting , pairwork , asking and answering
IV. Teaching aids
Textbook , tape , cassetter , pictures
V.Procedure
T’s activities Ss’ activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings
- Have Ss play agame :
Noughts and crosses
- Greetings
- Play a game
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>
- Ask Ss to make questions and answers
Ex : What do you learn in History class?
We learn about past and present events
…..
2. New activities
<1> Listen and read :
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the
questions
+ Where are the students ?
+ What are they doing ?
+ Do you like these games ?
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape .
- Explain some new words to Ss
+ Recess(n)
+ Bell (n)
+ Ring (v)
+ To chat (v)
+ To skip rope :
+ Bhind man’s bluff :
+ Marbles (n) :
+ Catch(n) :
( Use pictures to introduce new wordds )
- Checking technique :
What and where
- Remark
- Have Ss listen to the tape again & look at the
book
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud
- Ask Ss to complete the list :
Recess activities The most popular activity
+ meeting friends
……
- Call on some Ss to complete the list
a. Work with a partner
- Revision of the present continues tense
- Ask Ss to look at the picture again then work in
pairs asking anf answering about activities
- Make model
S1 : What is this boy doing ?
S2 : He is playing catch
2 groups take part in the game
- Listen carefully.
- Look at the picture carefully
and answer T’s questions
+ They are in the yard
+ They are playing///
- Listen to the tape
- Listen
- Guess the meanings read new
words in chrous and individually
then copy down
- Play a game
- Listen to the tape
- Read the text aloud
- Complete the list :
* Recess activities :
+ Meeting friends :
+ Talking about…
+ Eating
+ Dringking
+ Chatting
+ Playing catch/ marbles/
blindman’s bluff
+ Skipping rope
The most popular activity
+ Talking
- Speak about the use, form of the
present continues tense
S + to be + Ving
- Work in pairs
-Listen
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>
+ What are these students doing ?
They are talking
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of
the class
- Correct the mistakes if have
- Ask Ss to write down in the notebooks
b. Ask and answer questions with a parter
- Explain the aims of the x\exercise to Ss
- Make model with a good student :
+ What do you usually do at recess ?
+ What do you usually do after school ?
- Have Ss work in pairs
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class
- Correct the mistakes if have
2. Listen : Match each name to an activity
- Explain the aims of the lesson :
Mai, Kien , Lan , Ba are at recess
- Review activities at recess
- Ask Ss to predict what activity each student is
playing at recess.
- Call on 2 Ss to give their predictions.
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check the
prediction.
- Play the tape again for Ss to match.
- Have Ss exchange the result with a partner
- Call on some Ss to give the answers
- Correct and give the correct answers
+ Mai is playing catch
+ Kien is playing blind man’s bluff..
+ Lan is skipping rape
+ Ba is playing marbles
3. Consolidation
- Repeat the activities at recess
4. Home work
- Learn by heart new words by making sentences
with them
- Do exercise 1 at page 30 in workbook
- Prepare part B3,4
- Practice in front of the class
- Write in the notebook
- Listen to the teacher
- Answer T’s questions
I usually play catch or talk
with my friends
I usually play soccer
- Work in pairs
- Practice asking and answering
aloud
- Listen to the teacher
- Read the activities in the books
- Predict.
- Give the prediction.
- Listen to the tape and check.
- Listen to the tape & match.
- Exchange the result
- Give the answers
- Copy down
- Listen to the teacher
- Write home work
Preparing date : Friday, November 2nd 2008
Period 30 :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>
Unit 5 : Work and play
Lesson 5 : B - It’s time for recess (B3,4,5)
I. The aims :
After the lesson , Ss will be able to know about activities at recess of American
students. They continue practicing asking and answering about activities at recess
II. Language content
1. Vocabulary
- Pen pal (n) - Junior high school (n)
- Energetic (adj) - To swap (v)
- To score goal - Portable (adj)
- Earphone (n) - To ralax(v)
2. Grammar : Review the present simple tense
III. Technique:
Explaination, pairwork , groupwork , asking and answering
IV.Teaching aids
Textbook , sub_board , tape , cassette
V. Procedure :
T’s activities Ss’activities
1. Warm up
- Greetings
- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board
- Demonstrate the group which wins the game.
Lead in new lesson
2. New activities
<3> Read. Then answer the questions
- Ask Ss some questions about activities at recess in
VN and in orther continues
+ What do Vnamese students often do at recess ?
+ Do you know what students in other countries
often do at recess? ( or in the USA)
+ What activities do you like ?
- Explain some new words to Ss
+ Pen pal (n) : b¹n qua th
+ Junior hight school (n): trờng THCS
+ Energetic (adj) : Năng nổ , hiếu động
+ To score goal : Ghi b nà
+ Portable (adj): Có thể xách tay
+ Ear phones (n) : Tai nghe
+ To swap (v) : Trao đổi
+ To relax (v) : Th giãn
- Cheking technique : Rub out and remember
- Ask Ss to guess what students in the USA often do
at recess
- Greetings
- Play game in 2 groups
( Each groups has 3 students to
take part in the game )
- Clap hands
- Write down
- Answer T’s questions
- They often play catch
(marbles) blind man’s bluff or
talk , drink..
- Listen carefully
- Guess meanings , read new
words in chorus and
individually then copy down
- Play a game
- Guess
Skip rope Play blin man’s bluff
Play catch <sub>Recess</sub>
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>
- Call on some Ss to give their opinions
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape in
order to know exatly what American students often
do at recess
- Have Ss read the text and list the activities the
American students often do at recess
- Call on some students to give the answers
- Correct if necessary
- Call on some students to read the text in front of the
class
- Correct their pronunciation
*Questions :
- Ask Ss to read the text again to find out the answers
- Have Ss Exchange the result with their partners
- Call on some Ss to give the answers
- Correct and give the correct answers
a. Hoa’s penpal Tim goes to an American school
b. A ( short )
c. D (mostly boys )
d. D (work wide >
<4> Take a survery
- Explain the aims of the leeson
- Have Ss write the form of the survery in the
notebooks
- Introduce ask Ss to complete the table by asking
friends some questions such as :
What do you do at recess ?
Do you play soccer / skiprape….?
- Have Ss work in groups of three or four
- Call on some representatives to tell about activities
of their groups at necess
Ex : At recess , Trang skips rope , Trung plays catch
with other friends , and Hoa reads books…
- Ask Ss to write full sentences in the notebooks
- Call on some students to read their writings in front
of the class
- Correct the mistakes if necessary
<5> Play with words :
- Play the tape for Ss
- Ask Ss to look at the books and read after the tape
- Call on some Ss to read aloud
- Correct their pronunciation
3. consolidation :
- Repeat the acivities of American students at recess
- Names of activities at recess in Vietnam.
4. Home work :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for
each
- Do exercise 2 at pgae 31
- Prepare part A1 of Unit 6.
- Give the opinions
- Look at the book and listen to
the tape
- Read the text and list the
activities…
- Give the answers
+ Play basketball
+ Listen to music
+ Read
+ Swap baseball cards
+ eating & talking
- Read the text aloud
- Read the text and find out the
answers
- Exchange the results
- Give the answers
- Copy down
- Listen carefully
- Write the table in the
notebooks
- Listen to the teacher
- Work in groups
- Tell about activities
- Write full sentences
- Read aloud
- Listen to the tape
- Read after the tape
- Read aloud
- Listen
- Write home work
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>
WEEK 11
Preparing date : Sunday, November 4th 2008
Period 31:
Unit 6 : After school
Lesson 1 : A - What do you to do ? (A1)
I. The aims :
After the lesson , Ss will be able to speak about activities after school and give
the invitation , the requests
II. Language content
1. Vocabulary :
- To invite (v) - To practice (v)
- To come along - Together
2. Grammar:
- Let’s go to the cafeteria
- Why don’t you come along ?
III. Technique
Eleciting , pairwork , groupwork
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures
V. Procedure
T’s activities Ss’activities
1. Warm up
- Greetings
- Have Ss play a game: Networks
- Have Ss go to the board and write down
- Demonstrate the group which miss the games
Lead the new lesson
2. Presentation :
- Ask Ss some questions such as:
What do you often do after school ?
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the
question :
What are they doing ?
- Greetings
- Play a game
- 2 groups take part in the game
- Go to the board & write
- Answer T’s questions
- I often play soccer…
- Look at the pictures and
answer:
- They are playing volleyball
- They are doing their
homework
.talking
…………
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>
- Have Ss listen to the tape
- Explain some new words and structures
+ To invite (v) : mêi
+ To practice (v) : luyÖn tËp
+ To come along : ®i cïng
+ Together : cïng nhau
+ Let’s /go to the cafeteria and get
/ a cold drink
/ invite him
+ Why don’t you / come along ?
/ play soccer ?
- Ask Ss to make sentences using the structures:
3. Practice:
- Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape
again
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialougue
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of
the class
- Correct their pronunciation
- Answer :
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the
answers
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the
questions
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the
class
- Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers
then ask Ss to write down
a. She’s doing her math home work
b. They are going to get a cold drink in the caferia
c. He’s in the music room
d. He’slearning to phay the guitar
e. He usually meets his friends
f. She likes playing volleyball
4. Futher practice :
- Have Ss play a game :
Noughts and crosses
Lan
Do home work
These boys
Computer games
Minh
Watch T.V
You
Listen to music
Mai and Hoa
Talk
The girls
Skip rope
- Listen to the tape
- Listen carefully
- Read new words in chorus and
individually then copy down
_Make sentences
+ Let’s / go to the cinema
/ Play volley ball
+ Why don’t you / relax ?
/ play catch ?
- Listen to the tape
- Work in pairs
- Practice reading the dialogue
- Read the dialogue and find the
answers
- Work in pairs
- Practice asking and answering
- Copy down
- Play a game
2 groups make questions and
answers with the cries
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>
Nam
Play marbles
Long&Minh
Chat
Ba
Play the guitar
Model
S1 : What is Lan doing ?
S2 : She is doing her homework
5/ Home work :
_Write the answers in part A1 in the notebook. Make
5 questions with each structure
_Do exercise 1 at page 33 in workbook
_Prepare A2
Write home work
Period 32:
Unit 6:After school
Lesson 2: A-What do you do?(A2)
I-the aims:
After the lesson,Ss will be able to use adverbs of frequency with the present
simple tense for after-school activities
II-Language cantent:
1/Vocabulary:
Revisionadverbs of frequency:
Always,usually,sometimes,often,never
2/grammar
Review:the present simple tense
III-Technique:
Eleciting,pairwork,groupwork,asking…….
IV-Teaching aids
Textbook,sub_board,pictures
V-Procedure
T’s action Ss’action
1/Warm up:
_Greetings
_Have Ss review the old lesson by playing a
game called slap the board
_Read these words in Vietnamese
+Swim
+Read book
+Watch T.V
+Play computer games
+Play soccer
+Go to the movie
_give the result and remark
2/Presentation:
_Ask SS to look at the pictures in the books
_Greetings
_Play a game slap the board
_Slap in E words
_2 groups take part in the
game
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>
carefully
_Have Ss call the names of the pictures
_Call on someSs to give the answers
_Correct and give the corect answers:
1/Reading/studying in the library
2/Swimming in the pool
3/Playing computer games
4/Going to a movie
5/Playing soccer
6/Watching T.V
_Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering
about the pictures
_Make model
What are these students doing?
They are reading in the library
_Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
cllass
3/Practice
b/Ask Ss the questions
What do you usually do after school?
_Have Ss play a game:
Noughts and crosses
Always
Go swimming
Often
Play computer games
Never
Go to the library
Usually
Play soccer
Sometimes play computer games
Often
Go to a movie
Usually
Watch T.V
Often
Play tennis
Sometimes
Do homework
_Remark
_Ask Ss to use adverbs in the box to write a
sentences for each day of the week
_Have Ss Work in pairs asking and
answering
_Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class
_Remark and correct the mistakes
carefully
_Call the names of the
pictures
_Give the answers
_Work in pairs
_Practice in front of the class
_Listen to the teacher than
answer
I usually play soccer
_Play a game in 2 groups.
_Make questiona and
answers with the cues
_Write sentences
+ On Monday, I usually go to
the library
+ On Tuesday , I often play
socer with my friend
.
…
_Work in pairs
_Practice in front of
_Answer T’s questions
I always go to the library
after school
_Work in pairs
_Practice in front of the class
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>
Now ask and answer question,using
“How often……?”
_Make example with a student
+How often do you go to the library?
_Have Ss work in pairs asking and
answering,using the pictures in the book
_Call on some pairs to pratce in front of the
class
_Correct the mistake if have
4/Futher practice:
_Have Ss do exercise 5 at page 71 of
Language focus
_Give the information in the table and ask Ss
to look at the table then matching :
Activities Frequency
Go cafeteria never
Ride bicycle sometimes
Practice guitar often
Do home work usually
Play computer games always
_Call on some Ss to give the result
_Correct the mistakes
_Ask Ss to write about Ba, using the
information
Model :
_Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time
..
…………
_Call on 2 students to go to the board and
wirte down
_Remark and give marks
5/ Home work
_Write a sentence for each day of the week ,
using the advends of frequency
_Do exercise 2+3 at page 34 in work book
_Prepare part 3,4,5
_Do exercise 5
_Read the information in the
table and match
_Give the result
_Write sentences about Ba
_Go to the board and writes
_Write homework
_____________________________________________________________
Week 12 Preparing date :…..
Period 33 :
Unit 6 : After school
Lesson 3 : A_What do you do ? (3,4,5)
I/ The aims :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>
After the lesson , Ss will be able to read a text for details about pastime
activities
II/ Language content
1/ Vocabulary
_Sport
_A comie
_A president
_An anmversary celebration
_Collect
_C collector
_collection
2/ Grammar :
Review _The pusent simple tense
_The progresstive tense
III/ Technique :
Electing , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork
IV/ Teaching aids
Textbook , tape , cassette
V/ Procedure :
T’s action S’s action
1/ Warm up
_Greetings
_Have Ss play a game
Guessing game
_Ask Ss to write pentences about the activity
which they play after school
Ex : I usually play soccer after school
_Ask one student to go to the board and their
friends guess
_Remark
2/ New activities
<3> Read then answer
_Have Ss look at the pictures and guess what
the students are doing
_Call on some students to give their
prediction
+ Explain some new word :
+ Sporty (adj)
+ Comic (n)
+ a predident
+ an anmiversary celebration
+ To collect (v) + reheares (v)
+ a collection
+ collection (n)
_Have Ss read new words in chours and
individually
_checking technique
What and where
_Have Ss do an exercise
True or False prediction :
1. Nga, Ba and Nam are students in class 7
_Greetings
_Play a game
_Write sentences
_Guess what their friends do
after school
Ex : Do you play volleyball
after school ?
_ Look at the picture and
guess
_Give the prediction
_Listen and write down
Guess meaning, read in
chours and individually then
copy down
_Play a game
_Do exercise in groups
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>
A
2. They like sprots very much
3. Nga’s favorite pastime is jogging
4. Ba like collecting stamps
5. Nam plays soccer ecery afternoon
6. Nam usually watches T.V
_Have Ss work in groups to give their
predictions
_Call on some groups to give their
predictions
_Ask Ss to look at the book and read in silent
_Ask Ss correct the exercise
_Correct then give the corret\ct answer
1 – T 3 – F 5 – F
2 – F 4 – T 6 – T
_Call on some Ss to read the passage
Aloud
_Correct their pronunciation
_Ask Ss to look at the questions and read the
passage again to find out the answers
_Have Ss work in pairs
_Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class
_Correct the mistakes and give the correct
answers
a/ Her groups is rehearsaing a play for the
school anniversary celebration
b/ He gets American stamps from Liz , his
American friend
c/ The stamp collector’s club meets on
Wednesday afternoon
d/ Nam never plays games
_Ask Ss some more questions:
+ What dows Nga bike doing after school ?
+ What do Ba and his friend often do on
Wednesday afternoon ?
+ What do Ba and his friend often do after
school hours ?
<4> Listen Match each name to an activity
_Introduce the aims of the exercise
_Ask Ss to read the names and activities
_Ask Ss to give their predictions
_Have Ss listen to the tape (2 times )
_Call on some Ss to give the results
_Play the tape again to check the answers
_Correct and give the correct answer:
A – Mai – go to the school cafeteria
B – Nam – rehearse a play
C – Ba – go to the circers
D – Lan – watch movie
E – Kien – tidy the class room
<5> Play with words :
_Have Ss listen to the tape
_Ask them to look at the books and read after
the tape
_Work in groups
_Give the predictions
_Read in silent
_Correct the exercise
_Read the passage loudly
_Find out the answers
_Work in pairs
_Practice asking and
answering
_Copy down
_Answer T’s questions
_Listen carefully
_Read
_Give the prediction
_Listen to the tape
_Gice the results
_Check the answers
_Write down
_Listen to the tape
_Read after the tape
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>
_Call on some Ss to read in front of the class
_Correct their pronunciation
3/ Consolidation :
_Repeat the activities after school hours
_Ask Ss to write a paraguaph about after
school activities, using matching
_Remark
4/ Home work
_Learn by heart new words by writing 3
times for each
_Do exercise 4 at page 35 in work book
_Read alouds
_Listen
_Write a paragraph
Speak aloud
_Write home work
Preparing date :…..
Period 34 :
Unit 6 : After school
Lesson 4 : B_Let’s go < B1 >
I/ The aims
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make/give suggestions and accept
or refuse the suggestions…
II/ Language content
1/ Vocabulary :
Assigament (n)
Fun (adj)
2/ Structure :
_Let’s + V
_What about + Ving ?
_Why don’t / we
/ you
_Responses :
_Yes, let’s
_Good idea / ok
_Sorry, I can’t
III/ Technique
Eliciting , pairwork , froupwprk
IV/ Teaching aids
Text book , tape , cassette , picture , sub_road
V/Procedure
T’s action Ss’action
1/ Warm up
_Greetings
_Ask Ss some questions about themselves
+ What do you usually do after the school ?
+ Do you like playing soccer ?
+ Do you usuallt / go to the movie ?
/ play games ?
+ How often do you go to the movie ?
.
…
_Greetings
_Answer T’s questions
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>
_Remark
2/ New activities :
<1> Listen then practice in groups of flour
_Introduce the situation of the dialogue : Ba ,
Nam , Lan and Hoa are discussing about /
What they should do to relax
/ How they should relax
_Have Ss look at the picture and guess what
activities they are talking
_Call on some Ss to give their predictions
_Play the tape for Ss (2 times )
_Call on one student to give the answer
_Introduce some new words and structures:
+ Assignment (n) = home work
+ Fun (adj)
+ Suggestions :
+ Let’s go to my house
go to Lan’s house
+ Why don’t you relax ?
+ What about going to the movie ?
_Have Ss practice the dialogue in front of the
class
_Call on some groups to practice in front of
the class
_Correct the pronunciation
_Now answer :
_Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out
the answers for questions
_ Have Ss work in pairs
_ Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class
_Correct then give the correct answers
a/ Nam wants to go to the movies
b/ Lan does n’t want to go to the movies
because there aren’t any good movies at the
moment
c/ Lan wants ti kisten to music at her house
d/ Hoa does n’t want to go to Lan’s house
because she has too many assignments
e/ It’s Saturday
_Practice
_Have Ss practice , using given words :
1/ Let’s / listen / music
2/ What / Watch / movie
3/ Why / join us
4/ What / go / cafeteria
5/ Why / study / library
Make model :
S1 : Let’s listen to some music
S2 : Yes , let’s good idea
_Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class
_Correct the mistakes if necessary
3/ Consolidation
_Listen carefully
_Guess
_Give the predictions
_Listen to the tape
_Look at the books
_Give the answer
_Listen and write down
Read in chours and
individually. Write down.
Make sentences with
structures
_Practice the dialogue
_Practice in front of the class
_Read the dialogue then find
out the answers
_Work in pairs
_Practice asking and
answering aloud
_Copy down
_Practice in pairs
_Practice in front of the class
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>
_Give a mapped dialogue then ask Ss to
make a dialogue using given words &
phrases
You
Your friend
What..do..afternoon ?
Movies
Not good movie
Mai’s house
Tow far…not have a bike
take a bus
…
Ok
_Have Ss work in pairs
_Call on some pairs to make a dialogue in
front of the class
_Correct the mistakes then give the correct
dialogue
S1 : What should we do this afternoon ?
S2 : Let’s go to the movies
S1 : There is n’t any good movie on
S2 : What about going to Mai’s house ?
We can play a game togerther
S1 : But It’s too far. I don’t have a bike
S2 : Why don’t we take a bus ?
S1 : OK
4/ Home work
_Make & sentences for each structures
_Do exercise 1 at page 35 in work book
_Prepare B2
_Listen & make a dialogue
_Work in pairs
_Practice in front of the class
_Write down
_Write home work
Preparing date :….
Period 35 :
Unit 6 : After school
Lesson 5 : B_Let’s go ! (2)
I/ The aims
After the lesson , Ss will be able to know a magazine survery about the most
popular activities of American teenagees and ger further practice in leisure vocabulary
II/ Language content
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>
_Musical instrument
_Model
_Organization
_Scout
_Guide
_Coin
2/ Structure :
Revision : Present simple tense
III/ Technique
IV/ Teaching aids :
Electing , asking & answering , pairwork , groupwprk
V/ Procedure :
T’s action S’s action
1/ Warm up
_Greetings
_Have Ss play a game:
Pelmanison
Have 6 cards
<1> What about
<2> Why don’t
<3> Let’s
<4> Collectstamps
<5> Going to the circus ?
<6> You study in the library
_Remark
2/ Neww activities
_Ask Ss to list the activities that
teenagess like to do in their free time
_Explain some new words to Ss
+ Teenager (n) : thiếu niên
+ Musical mstrument (n) : Nhạc cụ
+ Model (n) : mẫu
+ Scout (n) : Hướng đạo sinh
+ Guide (n) :
+ Coin (n) : Tiền xu
+ Organization (n) : Tổ chức
_Checking technique
Rub out and remember
_Ask Ss to predict what American
(students) teenagers like to di in their
free time
_Call on some students to give then
predictions
_Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the
book and call the names of these
activities
_Ask Ss to look at the book and read
the text in silent
_Greetings
_Play a game
Pelmanism
2 groups take part in the game
_List the activities
_Listen carefully
_Guess meanings , read new words in
chours and individually
Copy down
_Play a game
Rubout & remember
_Predict
_Give the prediction
_Call the names of activities
+ Eating and drinking
+ Playing the guita
+ Going shopping
+ Watching T.V
+ Collecting things
+ Helping old people
_Read in silent
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>
_Have Ss give the names of activities
_Ask them to compare with their
predictions
_Remark and call some students to
read the text aloud
_Give some comprehension
questions:
1/ Which of the activities in the best
of American teenagers do you think
are aloo popolar among Vnamese
teenagers ?
2/ Are there many kinds of
entertainment for teenagers in VN ?
What are they ?
3/ What organizations are there for
teenagers in VN ?
4/
_Call on some Ss to give the answers
_Correct the mistakes
_Practice
_Ask Ss to discuss in groups of four
_Have Ss ask their friends with out
they like doing in their free time,
then make a list of their groups
favorite leisure activity in front of the
class
_Call on some groups to read about
their group’s favorite leisure
activities aloud
_Remark then give the most popular
activity of the students in class
_Compare with the activities of
American teenagers
3/ Consolidation:
_Repeat the top ten most popular
activities of American teenagers
_Learn by heart 10 most popular
activities
_Do exercise 2 at page 35 in work
book
_Prepare part 3,4
_Read aloud
_Answer
+ Watching T.V
+ Listening to music
+ Going to the movie
+ Helping old people
_Give the answers
_Work in groups
_Make a list of the group’s favorite
leasure activities
_Some groups read aloud
_Listen
_Listen
_Write home work
Week 13 : Preparing date :…
Period 36 :
Unit 6 : After school
Lesson 6 : B_Let’s go (3,4)
I/ The aims :
By the end of the lesson, Ss will continue praticing the invitation. They will be
bale to know how American teenagers help the ammunity
II/ Language content
1/ Vocabulary
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>
Wedding (n)
Elderly people
Community service
Volumteer (n)
Neighborhood clean_up
_Canpaigns
2/ Stucture :
_Would you like to…?
_Why don’t you…?
_What about….?
Yes, I’d love to
That would be great fun
I ‘d love to but I’m sorry I can’t
3/ Skill. Reading comprehension
III/ Technique :
Asking and answering , pairwork, groupwork
IV/ Teaching aids
Textbook , tape , cassette
V/ Procedure
T’s action Ss’ action
1/ Warm up : & check :
_Greetings
_Ask Ss some questions about what they like
doing in their free time
_Call on some one student to go to the board and
write down the activities of American teenagers
bike doing in their free time
_Remark and give mark
2/ New activities
<3> Listen then practice with a partner
Make similar dialogue
_Ask Ss some questions:
+ Do you usually use the invitations ?
+ In which occasions do you use these
invitations ?
+ How do you accept or reguse the invitations ?
Lead in to new lesson
_Introduce the invitation
+ Would you like to…?
Accept the invitation
Yes, I’d love to
That would be great fun
Refuse the invitation
I’d love to but I’m sorry I can’t
_Make example :
Would you like to have a drink ?
Yes, I’d love to
_Have Ss make some ssentences as model
_Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and listen to the
tape (two times )
_Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue
_Call on some pairs to role play the dialogue in
_Greetings
_answer teacher’s
questions
_Go to the board and
write down
_Write down
_Answer T’s questions
( Ss can answer the
questions in VN )
_Listen to the teacher
_Write down
_Make sentences
+ Would you like to go to
the movie with me ?
I’d love to but I’m
sorry I can’t
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>
front of the class
_Correct their pronunciation
_Have Ss based on the dialogue to make similar
dialogue
_Have Ss work in pairs
_Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class
_Correct the mistakes for Ss
<4> Read then discuss
_Ask Ss to tell the things teenagers con do to
help the community
_Explain some new words and phrases
+ Community servise (n) : Hđng giúp cộng
đồng
+ Eloderly people (n) : Người già
+ Stripe : Kẻ sọc
+ To concern (v) : Liên quan
+ Environment (n) : Mơi trường
+ Neighborhood : h ng xóm.à
Chiến dịch l m sà ạch khu dân cúe
_Checking technique : Rub out and remember
_Ask Ss to read the passage to find out the
activities which teenagers help the community
_Call on some Ss to give the answer
_Correct and give the correct answers :
+ Help olderly people
+ Work as hospital volumteer
+ Work on neigh borhoad clean_up campaigns
_Call on some Ss to read the passage
_Class discuss :
_Ask Ss to read the two questions then discuss
in groups
_Call on some groups to give the answers in
front of the class
_Correct the mistakes
3/ Consolidation
_Repeat the structures of invitation and activities
teenagers can help the commounty
4/ Home work
_Learn by heart new words & remember by
making sentences
dialogue in front of the
class
_Make similar dialogue
_Work in pairs
_Practice in front of the
class
_Tell the things teeagers
can do :
_Listen carefully
_Read in chours and
invidually, guess meaning
then write down
_Read the passage and
find the activities which
teenagers help the
comminuvity
_Give the answers
_Read the passage aloud
_Discuss in groups
_Give the answers in
gront of the class
_Listen carefully
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>
Period 37 :
Language focus 2
I/ The aims
By the end of the lesson ,Ss will review the know ledge which have been learnt
from unit 4 to unit 6 such as : The present continuons tense , time and subjects….
II/ Language content
Review : _ The present continuons tense
_ Time and subject vocabulary
_This, that , these , those
_Adverbs of frequency
_Making suggestions
III/ Technique :
Eleciting , pairwork , groupwork
IV/ Teaching aids
Textbook , sub_board , pictures if have
V/ Procedure
T’s action Ss’action
1/ Warm up :
_Greetings
_Have Ss play a game
Mini game
+ Brainstorm the activities at racess
+ Call on some of the students to present in
front of the class
+ Ask Ss to make sentences a loud activities in
the present continuous tense
_Remark
2/ Consolidation and practice
1/ Present proguessive tense
_Ask Ss to give the formation and use of the
present continuose tense
_Have Ss make sentences
_Ask Ss to do exercise 1
_Have Ss exchange the result with their
partners
_Call on some Ss to give their answers
_Correct & give the correct answers:
+ is doing
+ is writing
+ is reading
+ is cooking
+ are playing
+ is kicking
+ is sunning
2/ This & that, these & those
Greetings
_play agem
+ In pairs , Ss mine the
acativities to each other
+ Present to each other
+ Present in front of the
class
Make some dentences
_Give the formation and
use
+ S + am/is/are + Ving
- S + am /is/are + not +
Ving ?
? Am/is/are + S + Ving
Use : It is used to express
an action which is
happening at the time at
present
_Make sentences
We are learning E now
He is reading a book
_Do exercise 1
_Exchange the results
_Give the answers
_Copy down
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>
_Ask Ss to give the use of this, that, these,
those
_Ask them to look at the pictures carefully and
complete the dialogue
_Call on some Ss to do exercise in front of the
class
_Correct & give the correct answers:
b/ Put this bag away
That isn’t my bag ,mum
This is my bag
c/ Put those dirty souks (on the bed) in the
washing basket. These socks ?
No, those socks on the bed
d/ Throw away those comics
But, I like these comes,mom
<3> Time
_Ask Ss to look at the clocks in the book then
call the time
_Have Ss complete the dialogues in the books
_Ask them to work in pairs
_Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class
_Correct the mistakes
<4> Vocabulary : Subject
_Ask Ss to look at 6 pictures in the books and
call the correct aubject names
_Have some Ss to give the subject names in
front of the class
_Correct the mistakes & give the correct
answers
a/ Physical education
b/ Chemistry
c/ Math
d/ Geography
e/ English
f/ History
<5> Adverbs of frequency
_Have Ss look at the table and ask them to
write sentences about Ba, using adverbs of
frequency
_Make example :
Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time
_Askk Ss to erite four sentences about Ba
_Have Ss exchange the results with their
friends
_Call on som Ss to gieve the answers aloud
_Correct and give the correct answers
+ Ba seldom rides a bike to school
+ Ba always practices the guitar after school
+ Ba usually does his home work in the
evening
+ Ba sometimes plays computer games
<6> Making suggestions :
_Have Ss look at the table
_Ask them to read the short dialogues
_Give the use
_Look at the pictures and
complete the dialogue
_Do exercise
_Copy down
_Look at the clocks and
call the time
_complete the dialogues
_Wor in pairs
_Practice in front of the
class
_Look at the pictures and
call the correct names
_Give the subject names
_Copy down
_Look at the table and
write sentences about Ba
_Listen
_Write 4 sentences about
Ba
_Exchange the results
_Give the answers
_Copy down
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>
_Have Ss make similar dialogues using given
words or phrases
_Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class
_Correct the mistakes if necessary
3/ Furthes practice :
_Have Ss do exercise :
I/ Complete the sentences with the suitable
words or phrases
1/ ___don’t you come to my house ? Ok.
Let’s go (Why/let’s/what )
2/ What about __Halong Bay ? (tovisit / visit /
visitting )
3/ Would you like __badminton ?
(play / to play / playing )
4/ Children should __to bed early
(go/ to go / going )
5/ That’s a good__? Let’s go to the beach
(Thinking/ answer / idea )
II/ Do as directed in the brackets
1. He goes to the library three times a
week < make questions>
2. They will visit their grand parents to
night (change into negative form)
3. What do you usually do after school ?
(answer the questions ?
4. We play soccer (make a suggestion )
_Corerct the mistakes
4/ Consolidation
5/ Homework
_Review from unit 4 to unit 6
_Do test yourself 2
_Make dialogues in pairs
_Practice in front of the
class
S1 : Let’s play volleyball
S2 : Ok
S1 : Would you like to
watch movies ?
S2 : I’ d love to
_Do exercise
Go to the board and do
Go to the board and write
down
Write homework
Period 38 :
Preparing date :….
Test 45’
I/ The aims :
Qua b i kià ểm tra của học sinh , dánh giá sự tiếp thu kiến thức của từng học
sinh v tà ừng lớp qua từng đơn vị kiến thức v kà ĩ năng l m b i cà à ủa học sinh Từ đó
có kế hoặch v bià ện pháp rèn cho học sinh
II/ Language content
I/ Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets (2 ps+)
1. Lan and Hoa ( read ) in the library at the monent
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>
4. You can (find) the match books on the racks in the middle
II/ Choose the best answers (2ps)
1/__does Lan have science class ? At 8:40
a/ When b/ What time c/ How long
2/ Those books at the __of the library are in English
a/ front b/ back c/ Shelf
3/ In the USA , students__school uniforms
a/ Wear b/ Wearing c/ Don’s wear
4/ They are interested__literature
a/ on b/ at c/ in
5/ Ba learns to repair house hold appliances in__class
a/ Physcics b/ Electronues c/ Biology
6/ __do you go to the library ? once a week
a/ How long b/ How often c/ How
7/ There aren’t __good movies at the moment
a/ any b/ many c/ some
8/ Would you like __to my house for lunch ?
a/ come b/coming c/ to come
III/ Chose the suitable words to complete the passage (2 ps )
Enjoy – Study – many – language – about – events – geography – how
At school we __many things. In literature, we learn__books and write essagys.
In history , we study past and present__in VN and around the world. In__we study
different countries and their people. In physics , we learn about__things work. IN the
__class, we study E. We study__after things as well, such as music, sports and art.
We __all of our classes
IV/ Find mistakes and correct them
1/ It takes Huy three hours doing his homework every day
2/ How many does it cost to send this letter to China ?
3/ My father has less days off than Tim’s father
4/ Hoa playing the piano in her room at the moment
5/ Does Nam’s mother go always to work by bus ?
V/ Fill in each blank with one preposition (2 ps )
1/ Hoa’s new skirt was white __red and yellow flowers__it
2/ Lien made a cushion__her own room
3/ Nam lives a long way__his grandparents’s house
4/ Liz helped me a lot __my stamp collection
5/Did you speak __Mr.Robinson__your vacation__Da Lat ?
6/ Lam tried__the blue skirt but it didn’t fit
7/ There is a souvenir shop near the exist__the zoo
III/ Collecting the test
IV/ Remark
V/ Home work
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>
Period 39 :
TEST CORRECTION
<b>CHUA SOAN</b>
Period 40 :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>
Lesson 1 A_A student’s work (1)
I/ The aims :
After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about a student’s work and practice
comparativers with fewer and more
II/ Language content
1/ Vocabulary :
_Hour (n)
_To last (v)
_Hard
_Late later
_Early Earlier
_Few Fewer
_many more
2/ Grammar
Review the present tense
Structure : that takes about 2 hours each day
III/ Technique
Elecitinh , pairwork , groupwork
IV/ Teachingaids :
Textbook , tape , cassette
V/ Procedure :
T’s action Ss’ action
1/ Warm uo :
_Greetings
_Ask some questions about themselves
+ What time do your classes start ?
+ What time do they finish ?
+ How many hours a day do you do your home
work
Remark and lead in new lesson :
2/ New activities :
a/ Presentation
_Introduce the lesson “ You wil hear a
cowersation between Hoa and her uncle about
school work “
_Explin some new words :
+ An hour (n)
+ To last (v)
+ Hard
+ Late Later
+ Early earlier
+ Few fewer
+ Many more
_Have Ss play a game
Rub put and remember
_Have Ss predict the answers ,using questions
a,b,c,d
a/ What time do Hoa’s classes start and finish
b/ Do your classes start earlier or later ?
c/ How many hours a day does Hoa do her
homework ?
d/ Do you work fewer or more hours than Hoa ?
_Ask Ss to work in groups
_Call on some representatwes to give their
predictions
_Greetings
_Answer T’s questions
They start at
They finish at
_Listen carefully
_Listen and write down
_Guess meanings, read in
chours and individually
copy down
_Play game
_Predict the answers
+Work in groups
_Give the predictions
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>
_Presentation dialogue
_Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape
_Ask them to read the dialogue a gain and check
their preditions
_Remark
_Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue
_Call on some pairs to role phay the dialogue in
front of the class
_Correct the pronunciation
_Questions
_Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering
the questions
_Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions in front of the class
_Correct the mistakes and give the correct
answers
a/ Her classes start at 7 o’clock
b/ They finish at a quarter past elcrion
c/ She does her home work 2 hours a day
d/ She will visit her parents on their farm during
her vacation
b/ Practice :
_Explain the structure
That takes about 2 hours each day
= It takes Hoa about 2 hours to do her home
work each day
It takes Sb to make examples
_Ask Ss to make examples
_Give word cue to drikl
+ Hoa’s classes : 7:00
Our classes : 6:45
+ The film : 9:30
+ The play : 10 :00
+ Hoa (work ) : 2 hours
Miss Mai : 4 hours
Make example
S1 : Hoa’s classes start later than ourclasses
S2 : Our classes start earlier than Hoa’s classes
_Have Ss work in pairs
_Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class
_Correct the mistakes
c/ Production
_Ask Ss to make sentences comparing their
work with Hoa’s work using
earber/later/fewer/more
_Have Ss exchange the results with their
partners
_Call on some students to read then sentences
aloud
_Remark
3/ Consoldation
4/ Home work
_Learn by heart new words 48 in work book
_Look at the book &
listen to the tape
_Read the dialogue and
check the prediction
_Work in pairs
_Practice the dialogue in
front of the class
_Work in pairs
_Practice in front of the
class
_Copy down
_Listen carefully and
write down
_Make examples
_Write down
_Listen
_Work in pairs
_Practice in front of the
class
_Make sentences
_Exchange the results
_Read aloud
+ Do exercise 1 at page
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>
Preparing date :……
Period 41 :
Unit 7 : The world of work
Lesson 2 : A_Astudent’s wprk (2,3)
I/ The aims
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be bale to compare American
students’vacations and Vietnamese students’ vacations. Praticing reading and
listening skills
II/ Language content
1/ Vocabulary
_To celebrate (v)
_Easter (n)
_Thanks giving
_New year ‘s Eve
_Independence Day
_Chistmas
2/ Grammar :
_Review _The present simple tense
_Comparetive with later/earlier/fewer/more
III/ Technique
Explaining_Eleciting, Pairwork, groupwork
IV/ Teaching aids
Textbook_tape, cassette
V/ Procedure:
T’s action Ss’action
1/ Warm up & check
_Greetings
_Have Ss play a game :
Pelmanism
Early/ late/ longer/ few/ long / earlier / later /
fewer
_Device the class into 2 groups
_Greetings
_Play a game
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>
_Ask them to play game
_Remark
2/ New activities
<2> Read them answer the questions
_Introduce the situation of the lesson
_Present some new words:
+ To celebrate (v) : tổ chức, kỉ niệm
+ Easter :
+ Thanks giving :
+ New year’s Eve :
+ Independence Day :
+ Chistmas
_Correct their pronunciation
_Checking technique
_Have Ss play again
What and Where
_Ask Ss to do exercise T or F before reading
the letter
1/ Vnamese students have fewer vacation than
American students
2/ American students have the longest vacation
in winter
3/ They don’t have a Tet holiday
4/ their most important vacation is New year’s
day
5/ They usually spend their time with their
families on Thanks giving and Chirstmas Day
_Call on some groups to give their predictions
_Ask Ss to look at the book and read the letter
_Ask them to check their predictions
_Call on some Ss to give the answers in front
of the class
_Correct and give the correct answers
1 – T 2 – F 3 - T
4 – F 5 – T
_Call on 2 3 students to read the letter aloud
_Questions :
_Have Ss work in pairs
_Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering in front of the class
_Correct the mistakes and give the correct
answers
a/ Summer vacation in the longest in America
b/ During his vacation, Tim spends time with
his family
c/ Vnamese students have fewer vacations than
american students
_Have Ss fill in the grids
Vacations
Vn students
American students
Longest vacation
Tet holiday
Thanks giving
_Play game
_Listen carefully
_Listen
_Guess meanings, read new
worlds in chorus and
individually copy down
_Play game
_Do exercise
_Work in groups predicting
the statements T or F
_Give the precdictions
_Read the letter
_Check the predictions
_Give the answers
_Read the letter aloud
_Work in pairs
_Practice in front of the
class
_Copy down
_Fill in the grids
_Write down in the
notebooks
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>
Chistmas
Independence Day
Easter
New year’s / Eve Day
In the summer
V
X
X
September 2nd
X
Lunar December 30th
In the summer
X
V
V
July 4th
V
January 1st
<3> Listen. Write the name
_Ask Ss to look at the pictures carefully
_Ask Ss to predict the name of each picture
_Play the tape for Ss ( 2times)
_Call on some Ss to give their answers in front
of the class
_Correct and give the correct answers
a/ Thanhs giving
b/ Independence Day
c/ New year’s Eve
d/ Chistmas
3/ Consolidation
_Ask Ss to repeat (about) the names of the
public holidays in American and Vnamese
4/ Home work
_Learn by heart new words by writing 2 times
for each
_Do exercise 4 at page 44 in workbook
_Prepare part 4
_Look at the pictures
carefully
Precdict the names of each
pictures
_Listen to the tape
_Match the name with the
pictures
_Listen & check the
answers
_Give the answers
_Copy down
_Repeat the names of the
public holidays
_Write home work
Preparing date :….
Period 42
Unit 7 : The world of work
Lesson 3 : A_A student’s work
I/ The aims
After the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a typical student’s life. They
will continue practicing reading comprehension
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>
1/ Vocabulary :
_To review
_Typical
_Keer
_Lazy
_Period
_To take a look
2/ Grammar
Review : _The present simple tense
_Comparaties with few/many
III/ Technique
Eleciting , pairwork , groupwork , playing game
IV/ Teaching aids:
Text book , tape , cassette
V/ Procedure :
T’s action S’s action
1/ Warm up :
_Greetings
_Have Ss play a game
Net work
American public
holidays
_Devide the class into 2 groups
_Call on 2 dtudents represented for their
groups to go to the board and write down
_Remark
2/ Pre_reading
_Ask Ss some questions alout them selves
+ What do you do every day ?
+ How many hours a day do you study ?
+ Do you have to do a lot of home work ?
+ (Have) Introduce the situation of the lesson
_Explain some new words
+ period
+ To review
+ Typical
+ Keen
+ Lazy
+ To take a look
+ Definitely
_Have Ss play a game
_Remark
_Ask Ss to prediet the information about Hoa
1/ Hoa goes to school __day a week
2/ She has__periods aday
3/ She works __hours a week
4/ She has about__ hours of home work
every week
5/ Before test , she works __hours a week
_Have Ss work in groups
_Call on some representativies to give the
predictions
3/ While_reading
_Greetings
_Play a game
_2 students go to the board
and write
_Answer T’s questions
_Listen to the teacher
_Listen carefully
Guess meanings, read new
words in chours and
individually , then copy
down
_Play game
_Predice the information
about Hoa
_Work in groups
_Give the predictions
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>
_Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the
tape
_Ask them to read the text in silent and
check their prediction
_Call on some Ss to give the answers
_Correct and give the correct answers
1/ 6 days
2/ 5 period
3/ 20 hours
4/ 12 hours
5/ 45 hours
_Call on 3 4 students to read the text aloud
_Correct their pronunciation
_Questions
_Ask Ss to read the text again & find ort the
answers
_Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers
1/ Why do some people think that students
have an easy life ?
2/ Lucky number
3/ Does Hoa have to work at home ?
4/ Does Hoa work fewer hours than most
workers ?
5/ How many hours a week do you work ?
6/ Lucky number
7/ How many hours a week does she work
before tests ?
8/ How many work fewer or more than Hoa?
_Remark
4/ Post_reading
_Ask Ss some questions :
+ What do you think of a students life ?
+ Do you think students are lazy ?
_Remark
5/ Home work
_Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines
for each
_Write the answer in the notebooks
_Do exercise 2,3 at page 43,44 in work book
_Prepare part B1
_Listen to the tape
_Read & check the
prediction
_Give the answers
_Read the text aloud
_Read the text then find put
the answers
_Play game in groups
_Answer the questions based
on the text
_Answer T’s questions
_Write home work
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>
Week 15 :
Preparing date : Wednesday, december 6th 2006.
period 43 :
Unit 7 : the world of work .
Lesson 4 : B- The worker (1)
I The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about Tim’s Parents ‘job and the
time they work in aweek . They continue practicing reading comprehension .
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- To take care of ( v) -Mechanic ( n )
- Machine ( n )
- To work part- time - Shift ( n)
- To play golf - Homeless ( adj )
2. Grammar :
Review : the present simple tense
III. Technique :
Eleciting , pairwork , groupwork ,
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette ,
V . Procedure :
T’s Action Ss’ Action
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask students somes questions about Hoa and
themselves .
+ What do you think about Hoa ?
+ How many periods a day do you have ?
+ What do you think about students’ life ?
.
………
- Remark
2. New activities :
Pre – reading :
-Introduce the situation of the lesson
-Explain some new words or phrases :
+ To take care of ( v ) = to look after
+ To work part – time
+Mechanic ( n )
+ Machine ( n )
+ Shift ( n )
+ Homeless ( adj )
Checking technique : Play a game :
What and where
Ordering the main ideas :
- Ask Ss to predict the order of the main ideas
a. Mr Jones’s work .
b. Tim’s introduction of his family.
c. Mr Jones’s vacation time .
d. Mrs. Jones’s work .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to give their predictions in
-Greetings .
-Answer T’ questions
- Listen to the teacher
- Listen and write
Guess meanings , read
new words in chorus and
individually, then copy down
Play a game : what and
where .
- Predict the order of
the main ideas .
-Work in pairs
- Give the predictions .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>
front of the class.
While – reading :
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape .
- Ask Ss to read the letter then check their
predictions.
-Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the
class
- Correct and give the correct answers
1. B 2. D 3. A 4. C
-Call some Ss to read the letter in front of the class
-Correct the pronunciation .
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the
questions in the book .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistakes and give the correct
answers :
a. Mrs. Jones works at home . But three mornings
a week she works part – time at a local
supermarket.
b. She cooks for homeless people once a week .
c. Mr. Jones is a mechanic . He repairs machines
in a factory .
d. He works about 40 hours a week .
e. The Jones family always goes to Florida on
vacation . They have a great time there .
Post – reading :
Ask Ss to base on Tim’s letter to write a letter with
the information about their own family.
-Ask Ss to exchange their letters with their partners
- Call on some Ss to read the letter in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistakes if necessary .
3. New activities :
a. Read .
_ Ask Ss to look at the picture answer the question :
Can you guess what the man does ?
What are the daily duties of a farmer ?
_ Introduce the situation of the lesson .
_ Explain some new words to Ss.
+ To feed ( v ) :
+ To rest ( v ) :
+ Main crop ( n) :
+ Buffalo shed ( n ) :
+ Chicken coop ( n ) :
+ Real ( adj ) :
Checking technique : Rub out and remember .
Presentation text :
_ give some questions about Mr. Tuan and ask Ss to
- Look at the book and
listen to the tape
- Read the letter and
check the prediction
- Give the answers
- Read the letter in
front of the class.
-- Work in pairs
- Practice in front of
the class .
- Copy down.
-Write a letter about their
own family .
- Exchange the letters
with the partners
- Read the letter in
front of the class .
_ Answer the questions :
He is a farmer .
_ Listen to the teacher .
_Listen and write .
Guess the meaning , read
new words in chorus and
individually , then copy
down.
Play game
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>
guess the answers .
+ Does Mr. Tuan work more hours than Tim’s father ?
+ What time does he start work ?
+ What time does his work finish ?
+ How many vacations does Mr. Tuan have ?
_ Call some Ss to give their prediction .
_ Ask Ss to read the text about Mr. Tuan then check
their predictions .
_ Call on some Ss to give the answers
_Call some Ss to read the text aloud .
_ Correct the pronunciation .
b. Compare :
_Ask Ss to read the text about Mr. Tuan again and the
letter of Tim then make note about them .
_Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner .
_Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the
class .
_Correct the mistakes and give the correct answer
4. Consolidation :
-Ask Ss to repeat the work of the Jones family .
- Remark
5. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines
with each .
- Do exercise 1, 2 at page 44 , 45 in workbook.
- Prepare part 2,3
_ Guess the answers .
_ Give the prediction .
_ Read the text and check the
predictions .
_ Give the answers
a. Yes, he does.
b. He starts work at 6: 00
c. His work finishes at 6 pm
d. He has no real vacations .
_Read the text aloud .
- repeat the Jones family ‘
work .
- Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>
Preparing date : Friday , December 8th 2006 .
Period 44
Unit 7 : The world of work
Lesson 5: B- The worker ( 4,5 )
I. The aims :
After the lesson , Ss will continue to know about some basic jobs and practice
listening skill .
II.Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
_Shop assistant ( n)
_ To be on duty
_ Annual ( adj )
2. Grammar :
Review : the present simple tense .
III.Technique :
Brainstorming , pairwork , groupwork .
IV. Teaching aids :
Text book , tape , cassette .
V. Procedure :
T’s Action Ss’ Action
1. Warm up :
_ Greetings
_ Have Ss play a game : Net works
_Device the class into 2 groups.
_Call 2 students to present for their groups to write
down.
_Remark .
2.Pre_listening
_ Greetings
_ play a game
_Discuss in one minute .
_2 students go to the board and
write down.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>
_Have Ss predict what Peter / Susoon / Jane / Phong
does and howmay huors pen week he or she works ,
amount of vacation.
_Ask them to work in groups .
_Call some groups to give their predictions .
3.While -listening.
_Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check their predictions
(2 times ).
_Ask Ss to exchange the results with other groups.
_Play the tape again for Ss to check their results .
_Call some groups to give their results .
_Correct and give the corect answers .
NAME JOB HOURS VACATION
Peter Doctor 70 4 weeks
Susan Nurse 50 3 weeks
Jane Shop assistant 35 1 week
Phong Factory worker 48 2 weeks
_ Have Ss practice asking and answering using the grids.
_ Make example :
S1: What does peter do ?
S2 : He ‘s a doctor .
S1 : How many hours a week does he work ?
S2 : 70 hours
S1 ; How much time does his vacation last ?
S2 : 4 weeks
_ Have Ss work in pairs .
_ Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.
_ Remark .
Play with words :
_Have Ss read play with words .
_ Call on some Ss to read in front of the class .
_ Correct the mistake .
4.Post –listening :
_Ask Ss to use the grids and write about 4 people .
Example :
Peter is a doctor , He works about 70 hours a week .
He has 4 weeks’ vacation each year .
_ Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of the
class.
Correct the mistake .
1. Homework :
_Write a paragraph about 4 people in the notebook.
_ Do exercise unit 7 in bai tap bo sung .
_ Prepare part 1,2 of unit 8 .
_Predict what Peter / Susan /Jane /
Phong does ; how many hours
perweek he / she works , amount
of vacation.
_Work in groups.
_Give the predictions.
G1:
G2:
G3:
G4:
_Listen to the tape and check the
prediction .
_Exchange the result .
_ Listen to the tape and check the
result .
_ Give the result .
_Write down .
_ Practice in pairs .
_ Lis ten .
_ Work in pairs .
_ Practice in front of the class.
_ Read play with words .
_Read in front of the class.
_ Write about 4 people .
_ Read the writing in front of the
class.
_Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>
Week 16:
Preparing date : Wednesday , December 13th 2006
Period 45:
UNIT 8: PLACES
Lesson 1 : A_ Asking the way ( 1,2 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and answer the way to the
places . From that they will apply it in the life .
II.Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
_ National bank of Vietnam _ A souvenir shop
_ Saint Paul hospital _ Go straight ahead
_ Hanoi railway station _ take a first street
2. Grammar :
Could you tell me how to get there ?
Could you show me the way to …….?
III.Technique :
Eleciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV Teaching aids.:
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures
V. Procedure :
T’s Action Ss’ Action
1. Warm up :
_ Greetings .
_ Have Ss play a game : Jumbled words
BKAN LOIPHATS TOHEL
NSTOAIT TAMREK TOSP FEIFCO
_ Call 2 students to go to the board and rearrange
these words .
_ Correct the mistake and give the correct answer :
BANK HOSPITAL HOTEL
STATION MARKET POST OFFICE
2. New activities :
* Name the places :
_ Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book
carefully .
_ Have Ss call the names of the pictures .
_ Call some Ss to give the answer in front of the
class.
_ Correct and give the correct answer :
a. National bank of Vietnam
b. Saint Paul hospital
c. Hotel .
d. The central post office
e. Hanoi railway station
f. Dong xuan market
Listen and repeat . Then practice the dialogue
with a partner .
_ Ask Ss to look at the book and answer the
questions :
Who are they ?
Where are they ?
_ Greetings .
_ Play a game .
_ Rearrange the jumbled
words .
_ Look at the pictures
carefully .
_ Call the names of the
pictures .
_ Write down .
Look at the book and answer
the questions .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>
What does the tourist want ?
_ Introduce the situation : A tourist is asking the
way .
_ Present some new words and structures :
+ A souvenir shop ( n )
+ Could you tell me how to get there ?
+ Could you show me the way to the
supermarket?
+Go straight ahead . Take the first street .
+ Go straight to the first street . Turn left .
_Ask Ss to make sentences with the structures .
_ Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape
then answer the question :
Where does the tourist want to go ?
_ Call on one student to answer the question .
_ Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read after the
tape .
_ Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .
_ Call on some pairs to read in front of the class .
_ Correct the pronunciation.
_ Give some places and ask Ss to practice in pairs .
Rong market , Post office .
_ Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class .
_ Correct the mistake if necessary .
3.Consolidation :
_ Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the way
to the places in their neighborhood .
_ Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
_ Remark and repeat the structures about asking
the way .
4.Homework :
_ Learn by heart new structures by making 3
sentences with them .
_ Do exercise 1 at page 47 in workbook .
_ Prepare part 3.
_ Listen to the teacher .
_ Listen and write .
Read new words in chorus
and individually , then copy
down .
_ Make sentences .
S1 : Could you tell me how to
get to the theater ?
S2 : Go straight ahead . Turn
left . It’s on your right .
_ Look at the book and listen
to the tape .
_ Answer the question :
He wants to get to a souvenir
shop .
_ Read after the tape .
_ Work in pairs .
_ Practice in front of the
class.
_ Practice in pairs .
_ Practice in front of the class
S1: Could you show me the
way to Rong market ?
S2: Go straight ahead . Turn
left . It’s on your right .
_ Practice in pairs asking and
answering the way .
_ Practice in front of the class
_ Listen to the teacher .
_ Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>
Preparing date : Thursday , December 14th 2006
Period 46:
UNIT 8 : PLACES
Lesson 2: Asking the way ( 3 )
I. The Aims .
The students will continue to practice asking for and giving directions to the places
and prepositions of place .
Practice speaking and writing skills .
II. Language content .
The simple present tense with the Structures of asking and answering the way .
III. Technique .
Brainstorming , pair work , group work.
IV. Teaching aids .
Text book , Cassette ,Tape , Pictures.
V. Procedure .
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
_ Greetings .
_ Have Ss play a game : Networks .
_ Call 2 students from 2 groups to go to the board
and write down .
_ Remark .
2. Presentation :
_ Ask Ss to look at the street map carefully .
_Ask them to call the places in the street map
.
_ Have Ss say about the places’ positions .
_ Introduce the question and answer about the
places .
Example :
Where is the bank ?
The bank is between the hotel and the
restaurant . It’s opposite the hospital .
3. Practice :
_ Greetings .
_ Play a game : Networks.
_ 2 groups take part in the
game .
_ Go to the board and write
down .
_ Look at the street map
carefully .
_ Call the places in the street
map.
_ Say about the places’
positions.
_ Listen carefully .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>
_ Ask Ss to look at 8 places in the box and the
street map .
_ Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering
about these places .
_ Call some pairs to ask and answer in front of
the class .
_ Correct the mistakes if necessary .
4.Production :
_Ask Ss to look at the street map again .
_ Explain the aims of the exercise to Ss : Listen to
the directions then find out the places .
_ Make model :
Go straight ahead to the third street , tunr right ,
what is between the movie theatre and the
bakery ?
It’s toystore .
_ play the tape for Ss ( 2 or 3 times )
_ask them to exchange the results with their
partners .
_ Play the tape again for Ss to check the results
_Correct the mistake then give the correct
answers .
a. Souvenir shop
b. Shoe store
c. Hotel
d. Drugstore
e. Hospital
Give some places for Ss to practice :
Restaurant / museum / book store
_ Ask Ss to give the directions to these places .
_ Call on some Ss to give the directions in front
of the class .
_ Correct the mistake if necessary .
5.Homework :
_ Write the directions to 8 places in the box .
_ Do exercises in BTBS .
_Prepare part 4,5 .
_ Look at 8 places in the box
and the street map .
_ Work in pairs .
_Practice in front of the class
S1 :Where is the police
station ?
S2: The police station is
between the post office and
museum . It’s opposite the
stadium .
S1: Where is the shoe store ?
S2: The shoe store is between
the restaurant and the hotel .
It’s opposite the supermarket
_ Look at the street map
again .
_ Listen carefully .
_ Listen to the tape carefully
_ Exchange the result with the
partner .
_ Listen to the tape then check
the answer .
_ Write down .
_ Give the directions to these
places .
_ Give the directions in front
of the class .
_ Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>
Preparingdate : Friday , December 15th 2006
Preiod 47:
<b> UNIT 8 : PLACES </b>
Lesson 3 : A - Asking the way( 4,5 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice asking and answering about
distances between two places with “ How far …”
II.Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
_ A long way
_ Have a guess
_ Coach
2. Structure :
It takes + time + to get …….
How far is it from …….to …….?
III.Technique :
Eliciting , Pair work , group work
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , cassette , tape , map .
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Hangman ( 3 words )
+ The first word has 6 letters . It is used for
asking about distance .
+ The second word has 5 letters . It is used for
measuring distances .
+ The third word has 8 letters . It is also used for
measuring distance.
- Remark .
2. New activities :
a. Listen and repeat . Then practice the dialogue
with the partner.
-Introduce the aim of the lesson , then explain
some new words and structures .
+ A long way ( n )
+ Have a guess
+ Coach ( n )
+ It takes about 18 hours to get there by coach .
- Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and listen to the
tape .
-Ask Ss some questions about distance using :
how far is it from……… ………….to ?
Example :
How far is it from your house to school ?
How far is it from Nam Dinh to Ha Noi ?
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and read after
the tape .
- Greetings.
- Play a game : Hangman .
+ How far
+ meter
+ Kilometer
-Listen to the teacher carefully .
Guess the meanings , read new
words in chorus and individually
then copy down .
-Look at the dialogue and listen
to the tape .
-Answer T’s questions
It’s about one kilometer .
It’s about 90 kilometers .
-Listen to the tape and read after
the tape .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class .
- Correct the pronunciation .
- Ask Ss to answer the question :
How far is it from Hue to Ho Chi Minh city ?
How far is it from Hue to Ha noi ?
b. Look at this table of distances in km . Ask and
answer questions with a partner.
- Ask Ss to look at the map and the table in the
book carefully .
- Make example :
How far is it from Vinh to Hanoi ?
It’s about 319 km
_ Have Ss work in pairs asking and answerring
about the distances .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class .
- Correct the mistake if necessary . Ask Ss to write
down in the notebooks .
3. Consolidation :
* Ask Ss to practice in pairs , using the street map
about the stores and the table b in language focus
3 , then make a conversation about giving
direction .
- Make example :
S1 : Could you tell me how to get to the bookstore
from the library ?
S2 : Go straight ahead to the park , take the first
street on the left and go along Hue street . The
bookstore is betweenthe minimart and the
restaurant .
S1 : How far is it from the library ?
S2 : about 500 meters .
S1 : thank you .
S2 : You’re welcome .
- Ask them to work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistake and ask them to write down
4. Home work :
- Do exercise 2 at page 48 in work book .
- Prepare part B1
dialogue .
-Practice in front of the class .
-Answer the question :
It’s about 1,030 km.
It’s about 680 km .
-Look at the map and the table
carefully .
-Listen carefully .
- Work in pairs .
-Practice in front of the class.
-Write down .
-Listen carefully .
-Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Write down .
- Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>
Week 17 :
Preparing date : Wednesday , December 27th 2006
Period 48:
UNIT 8 : PLACES
Lesson 4 : B- At the post office ( 1 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to give the requirements . They will practice asking
and answering about the price .
II.Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Envelope ( n ) - Altogether ( adv )
- to send ( v ) - Change ( n )
- To mail ( v ) - to receive ( v )
2. Structures :
- I’d like to + V + ……..
- How much does/ do + S + cost ?
- How much is / are + S ?
III.Technique :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette .
V. Proceduce :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask Ss some questions such as :
Where do you often buy stamps ?
Which services are supply at the post office ?
- Remark and lead in the new lesson .
2. Presentation :
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and introduce some
services at the post office such as : sending letters ,
sending and receiving parcels , money , buying
envelopes , stamps ….then explain some new words
and structues :
+ Envelope ( n ) : phong b×
+ To send ( v ) : göi
+ To mail ( v ) : göi th.
+ To receive ( v ) : nhËn
+ change ( n ) : tiỊn lỴ, tiỊn thõa .
+ Altogether ( adv ) : tỉng céng
* Checking technique : Slap the board .
* Structures:
+ I’d like to + V ….
+ How much is / are + S ?
Example :
I’ d like to send this letter to the USA ?
How much is the shirt ? It’s 2,000 dong
How much are these envelopes ? they are 5,000dong
- Ask Ss to make sentences , using the structures .
- Introduce the situation of the conversation then ask
Ss to do exercise .
Exercice : T or F predictions
a. Liz’d like to send the letter to great Britain .
b. She need some envelopes .
c. They are 2,500 dong .
d. The stamps for her letter cost 9,000 dong .
e. The envelopes and the stamps are 11,500 dong .
- Ask Ss to work in groups .
- Call on some groups to give their predictions .
3.Practice :
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then
check the predictions .
- call on some Ss to give the answers , correct and
give the correct answers :
a. F b. T c. F d. F e. T
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of
the class.
- Correct the pronunciation .
- Ask Ss to look at the dialogue again to find out the
answers for the questions in the book .
- Have Ss play a game : lucky numbers
- Greetings .
- Answer the questions
( Ss can answer the questions in
Vietnamese )
- Listen carefully .
- Look at the picture and listen
carefully .
Guess the meanings , read new
words in chorus and individually ,
then copy down .
- Play game : Slap the board .
- Make sentences with the structures
- Listen to the teacher .
- Work in groups .
- Give the predictions
- Look at the book and listen to the
tape then correct the predictions .
- Give the answers
- Practice in pairs .
- Practice in front of the class.
- Look at the dialogue again
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>
(1) Where is your nearest post office ?
( 2) LN
(3) Where will Liz mail her letter to ?
( 4) How much is the letter to the USA ?
(5) How much are these envelopes Liz needs ?
(6) LN.
(7) How much does Liz pay altogether ?
(8) How much change does Liz have ?
- Remark and ask Ss to write the answers in the
notebooks .
4.Production :
-Ask Ss to write a passage using the questions given
+ Where is your nearest post office ?
+ How can you get there from your home ?
+ What can you buy there ?
+ Hwo much is it to mail a letter in Viet nam ?
+ What else can you do at the post office ?
- Go around class and provide help .
- Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the
class .
- Correct the mistake and remark .
5. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words and structures by write 2
lines for each word and make 3 sentences for each
structure .
- Do exercise 1 at page 50 in workbook .
- Prepare part 2,3 .
the questions .
- Play a game in groups .
- Answer the questions
- Write down .
- Write a passage .
Ex: my nearest post office is about
500 meters from my house . I can
get there by bike . there I can buy
envelopes , postcards , stamps. A
letter in VN costs 800 dong . I can
make a phone call there , too .
- Read the writing aloud .
- Write homework .
-
Preparing date : Thursday , December 28th 2006
Period 49
UNIT 8 : PLACES
Lesson 5 : B- At the post office ( 2, 3 )
I.The aims :
Reading the dialogue to understand the details and get further practice in “ Need /
would like “ and post office vocabulary . Practice reading and writing skills .
II.Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Local stamp ( n ) - Overseamail ( n )
- Phone card ( n ) - Postcard ( n )
- Writing pad ( n )
2. Grammar :
The simple present with : Need / Would like
III.Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , asking and answering .
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , real things such as ; stamp, phone card , post card ,
writing pad .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>
V. Procedure :
<b> T s Activities </b>’ Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Hangman ( 3 words )
Stamp , Envelope , letter
_ Remark and lead in the new lesson .
2.New activities
a. Listen and read then answer the questions.
- Introduce the situation of the dialogue and
explain some new words :
+Local stamp ( n ) : (Real thing)
+ Writing pad ( n ) :
+ Phone card ( n ) :
+ Post card ( n ) :
+ Oversea mail ( n ) :
Checking technique : What and where
- Ask Ss to guess 3 things Hoa wants from the post
office .
- Call on some Ss to give their predictions .
- Write down on the sub- board .
- Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape .
- Ask Ss to check their predictions .
- Call on some Ss to give 3 things Hoa wants from
the post office .
- Correct and give the correct answer :
+ Some local stamps .
+ Some stamps for overseamail .
+ A phone card .
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the
answers for the questions in the book .
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the
questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class.
- Correct the mistake then give the correct answers
a. Hoa needs some local stamps , some stamps for
overseamail and a phone card .
b.She needs stamps for overseamail because she has a
penpal in America .
c.She needs a phone card to phone her parents once a
week .
b) Complete the dialogue . Then make up similar
dialogues ; use the words in the box .
- Greetings .
- Play a game : Hang man
- Listen to the teacher .
- Look at the things given
by teacher then guess .
Read new words in
chorus and individually
then copy down .
Play game .
- Guess 3 things Hoa wants
from the post office .
- Give the predictions .
- Look at the books and
listen to the tape .
- Check the predictions .
- Give the answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice reading in front
of the class .
- Find out the answers for
the questions .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class.
- Write down .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>
- Introduce the aim of the exercise to Ss : Complete
the dialogue with the suitable words
- Have Ss do the exercise .
- Ask them to exchange the result with the partner
.
- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of
the class .
- Correct and give the correct answer .
Hoa : I would like five local stamps and two stamps
for America .
Clerk : Here you are . Is that all ?
Hoa : I also need a fifty thousand dong phone card .
How much is that altogether ?
Clerk : That is seventy – five thousand dong .
Hoa : Here is eighty thousand dong .
Clerk : Thanks . Here is your change .
- Call on 2 pairs to read the completed dialogue
aloud .
Ask Ss to make up similar dialogues , using the words
in the box .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front the class .
- Correct the mistakes if necessary .
3.Consolidation :
- Ask Ss to make the dialogue , using mapped
dialogue given ;
CLERK YOU
Some envelopes and
……
some post cards . Here….is …..all ?
send letter USA.
… … …
How much………? 9,500 dong
30,000dong phone card .
…
How much…altogether ? 45,000dong
Thank you …….welcome .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class
.
- Correct the mistake .
- Have Ss work in pairs ( one is the clerk , one is
the customer ) making the dialogue at the post
office .
- Call on 2 pairs to go to the board and make the
dialogue .
- Remark and give marks .
4.Homework :
- Learn by hear new words by writing 2 lines for
each .
carefully .
- Do exercise individually .
- Exchange the result with
the partner .
- Give the answers in front
the class .
- Write down .
- Make the similar
dialogues .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class.
- Make the dialogue , using
the mapped dialogue ,
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Write down .
- Work in pairs .
- Go to the board and make
a dialogue .
- Write home work .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>
- Do exercise 2 at page 50 in workbook .
- Prepare part 4,5 .
Preparing date : Friday , December 29th 2006
Period 51 :
UNIT 8 : PLACES
Lesson 6 : B- At the post office ( 4,5 )
I .The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to listen for details to get further practice
in post office vocabulary and tell the price .
Practice listening skill .
II.Language content :
Review : - Post office vocabulary .
- Structures : How much is / are + S ?
How much does / do + S + cost ?
III.Technique :
Brainstorming , Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette . real things ( stamps, phone card , envelopes , writing
pads…)
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Networks
- Divide class into 2 groups. Ask them to
discuss then call 2 students from 2 groups to
go to the board and write.
- Remark and lead in the new lesson.
-Greetings.
- Play a game : Networks
- 2 groups take part in the
game.
- Go to the board and write.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>
2.Pre – listening :
- Ask Ss to look at the things in the book, and
then call the names of these things.
- Introduce the things Mrs. Robinson will buy ,
and ask them to predict what Mrs. Robinson
will buy first , second … and predict how
much she spend on each of these 5 items .
- Have Ss work in groups.
- Call on some groups to give their predictions.
3.While – listening :
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check their
predictions about the order.
- Call on Ss to give the answers.
- Correct the mistake and give the correct
answers
+ Envelopes.
+ A pen.
+ A writing pad.
+ Stamps.
+ A phone card.
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and check
the price.
- Call on some Ss to give the answers.
- Correct the mistake and give the answer key :
+ Envelopes : 2,000 dong
+ A pen : 1,500 dong
+ A writing pad : 3,000 dong
+ Stamps : 500 dong
+ A phone card : 50, 000 dong
Ask Ss to answer the question: What is the total
cost?
How much change will Mrs. Robinson have from
60,000 dong?
- Ask Ss to write down the questions and
answers in the notebooks.
4.Post – listening :
- Have Ss answer the questions in part 5.
- Make example :
T: How much is it to mail a local letter in VN?
S: It is 800 dong.
- Ask them to work in pairs.
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front
of the class.
- Correct if necessary and ask them to write the
questions and the answers in the notebooks.
5.Homework :
- Do exercise 3 at page 52 in workbook.
- Review unit 1 to 8.
- Look at the things and call
the names.
- Listen to the teacher and
predict what Mrs.
Robinson will buy first ,
second …,
- Predict how much she
spends on each of these 5
items.
- Work in groups.
- Give the predictions.
_ Listen to the tape and check
the predictions.
Give the answers.
- Listen to the tape again and
check the price.
- Give the answers.
- Listen and write down.
- Answer the questions.
+ The total cost is 59,000
dong
+ She will have 1,000 dong
_ Write down.
- Answer the questions.
- Listen carefully.
- Work in pairs.
- Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class.
- Write down.
- Write homework.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>
WEEK 18:
Preparing date: Thursday, January 4th 2008
Period 52+ 53 :
<b> Review the first semester </b>
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will review the knowledge which they have learnt from
unit 1 to unit 8 . From that they will aplly them to do the test well .
II.Language content :
Review : - The present progressive tense .
- The simple future tense .
- Comparative .
- Asking and answering about distance .
- Exclamation .
- Adverbs of frequency .
- Asking and answering about the price .
- Making suggestions .
- Invitation.
- Asking the way .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork .
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , sub- board , chalk .
V. Procedure :
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Chatting some questions with Ss .
2. Consolidation and practice :
A. The present progressive tense :
- Ask Ss to give the form and use of the present progressive tense :
Form: ( + ) S + am / is / are + V-ing .
( - ) S + am / is / are + not + V- ing .
( ? ) Am / is / are + S + v- ing ?
Use : It is used to express an action which is happening at a time at present . It
usually goes with adverbs of time such as : now / at the moment / at present .
Examples: She is listening to music at the moment .
They are playing marbles in the yard now .
- Have Ss make sentences as model .
B. The simple future tense :
- Have Ss give the form and the use in front of the class .
* Form : ( + ) S + Will + V ( without To ) .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>
Use : It is used to express an action or a plan which will happen in the future . It
usually goes with adverbs of time such as : Tomorrow , Next week / month / year
..
…
Example: She will go to Ha noi tomorrow .
They will have a party next week .
- Ask Ss to make sentences .
C. Comparative :
a) Short adjectives :
- Have Ss give the form :
S1 + Tobe + adj + er + than + S2 .
EX: She is taller than me .
This ruler is longer than that one .
- Have Ss make sentences in front of the class .
b) Long adjectives :
_ Ask Ss to give the form :
S1 + Tobe + more + adj + than + S2 .
EX: This pen is more expensive than that one .
He is more inteligent than his brother .
Especial cases :
Good / well => better
Bad / ill => Worse
Many / much = > More
Little => Less
Far => Farther / further .
D. Asking answering about distances :
- Ask Ss to give the structure about asking and answering the distances :
How far is it from……… ………….to ..?
It’s about ……….km/m
EX: How far is it from your house to school ?
It’s about 2 km .
How far is it from NamDinh to Ha Noi ?
It’s about 90 km .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
E. Exclamations :
What + a / an + ( adj ) + N !
What + ( adj ) + Ns !
EX : What a nice picture !
What a cold day !
What naughty boys !
- Have Ss make sentences .
F. Adverbs of frequency :
Always / usually / often / sometimes / seldom / rarely / never ….
- Ask Ss to say about the position of adverbs :
Ex : He always gets up at 5:00 in the morning .
I am never late for school .
G. Asking and answering about the price :
How much + is / are + S ? => S + is / are + ……….
How much + does / do + S + cost ? => It/ They + costs / cost + ……..
Ex : How much does this shirt cost ? => It costs 50,000 dong .
How much are these envelopes ? => They are 2,000 dong .
H. Making suggestions :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>
- Should we + V ?
- How about + V-ing ?
- What about + V-ing ?
- Why don’t we + V ?
Agreement : OK / I’d love to /That’s a good idea .
Disagreement : + I’m sorry , I can’t .
+ I’m sorry , I can’t . I’m busy .
+ I’d love to but I’m going to………
+ Thanks anyway .
EX : Let’s go to Lan’ house .
Should we play table tennis ?
What about going to the movies ?
Why don’t we go to the beach ?
<i><b>I.</b></i> <i><b>Invitation </b></i>
Would you like + N ?
Would you like + to V ?
EX : Would you like to go to the concert with me ?
Would you like to come to my house for lunch ?
Yes , I’d love to / Yes , please / All right .
No, thanks / I’d love to but I’m busy .
J. Asking the way :
- Is there ……near here ? / Where is …….?
- Could you tell me how to get there ?
- Could you show me the way to the ……..?
- How can I get there ?
Go straight ahead / go long this street . Take the first / second street on the
left / right ./ Turn right / left .
EX : Could you show me the way to the post office ?
Go straight ahead , Take the first street on the right . It is opposite the police
station .
K. Buying things :
I’d like + N
Can I have a/ some + N , please ?
I need to buy an English book , please ?
3. Further practice :
Exercise 1: Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets .
a. Tomorrow ( be ) ………..my birthday , so I would like you to come to my house
for dinner tonight .
b. You shouldn’t make noise when our teacher ( teach ) ………..
c. The next Sunday will be Lan’s birthday so I ( buy ) ………..a gift for
her tonight .
d. Chi ( have ) ……….a lot of English books .
e. Minh never ( go ) ………..to the zoo by bike .
f. Listen ! She ( play ) ………the piano .
g. We usually ( play ) ……….Blindman’s bluff at recess.
h. My father never ( drink ) ……….coffee , but at the moment he ( drink )
.it
………
i. I’d like ( buy ) ………some envelopes .
j. The children enjoy ( read ) ………..picture books .
Exercise 2: Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given .
a. She doesn’t have as many toys as I .
=> She has ………..
b. There is less coffee in my cup than there is in your cup .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>
=> There is ………
c. I don’t have so many friends as my sister .
=> I have ……….
d. My friends have more candies than I .
=> I don’t ………
e. My brother drinks more coffee than my sister .
=> My sister drinks ……….
f. She eats more chocolate than I .
=> I eat ………
g. She has less flour than he has .
=> He has ……….
h. There are more students in my class than there are in her class .
=> There are ………
i. There is less water in a dessert than there is in a mountain .
=> There isn’t ……….
j. There are fewer singers in a small city than there are in a big city .
=> There aren’t ………..
Exercise 3 : Choose the best anser .
1. Hurry or you’ll be late ……….school .
A. with B. for C. at
2. My homework ………about two hours each day .
A. takes B. has C. gives
3. Our summer vacation starts in june . It ……….almost two months .
A. happens B. takes C. lasts
4. What do you do ………the vacation ?
A. during B. while C. when
5. We have fun ………together on the farm .
A. working B. work C. to work
6. We don’t have classes on Saturday , but we work one hour ………..each day .
A. more B. much C. many
7. Viet namese students have …………vacations than American ones .
A. few B. fewest C. fewer
8. Many women work …….home .
A. at B. in C. on
9. They take …………..of the house and look after the children .
A. care B. homework C. notice
10.My brother always goes to bed early , but he …………..gets up early .
A. not B. never C. ever
Exercise 4: Give the correct form of the adj/ adv in parentheses .
1. This house isn’t very modern . I want a ( modern) ……….one .
2. That building is the ( high ) ………..one in our town .
3. Nam is a good tennis player . I think he is the ( good ) …………in the club .
4. My bag isn’t very heavy . Your bag is ( heavy ) ………..
5. We don’t know many people . You know ( many )………..people than us .
6. It is a very bad film . It’s the ( bad ) ………….film I’ve ever seen .
7. What is the ( long )……….river in the world ?
8. Tuan doesn’t work hard . I work ( hard )………
9. She doesn’t know much . Her sister knows much ( much )……….
10.They have little freetime but we have ( little )……….
Exercise 5 : Rearrange the words or phrases to make meaningfull sentences .
1. To/ take/ often/ Mai /minutes / get/ her/ to /bus/ school /it / ten/ by .
………
2. House / is / it / Minh’s / far / to / apartment / how / from/ Lien’s ?
.
………
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>
3. Younger / more / work / hours / my / sister / I / than .
………
4. Hotel / show / you / me / way / the / to / Bong Sen / Miss / could / the ?
.
………
5. Clerk / would / I / like / fifty/ a / thousand / phone / dong / card .
………
6. Grow / farmers / some / but / main / their / crop / rice / is / the / vegetables .
.
………
7. Please / show / me / you / way / the / to /station / nearest / could/ the / police ?
..
………
8. By / me / it / about / takes / minutes / ten/ to / from / go / my / to / house / my /
factory/ bike / often / father’s .
………
.
…
9. Phone / stamps / would / some / for / Great Britain / a / card / clerk / I / like / and.
10.Loves / theatre / to / Chi/ going / join/ school/ group / she / acting / much/ is / the /
because / very .
………
...
…
4. Consolidation :
Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed .
5. Homework :
- Do exercises in the notebooks .
- Review for doing the first semester test .
Preparing date : Friday , January 5th 2008
Period 54 :
<b> The first semester test </b>
I.The aims :
The students will apply the knowledge they have learn to do the test , through the
test the teacher will know the knowledge of each student .
II. Test :
Question 1 : Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the verbs .
1. I’d like ( buy ) ……….some stamps for overseasmail .
2. We ( rehearse ) ………..a play at the moment .
3. Where they ( spend ) ………..their summer vacation next year ?
4. Students in the USA usually ( not wear ) ………..uniform.
5. My brother ( go ) ………to the youth club every weekend .
He enjoys ( play ) ………..sports very much .
Question 2 : Read the passage then answer True or False .
I live in a house near the sea . It’s an old house . about 100 years old , and it’s very
small . There are two bedrooms upstairs but no bathroom . The bathroom ids downstair
next to the kitchen and there is a living room where there is a lovely fireplace . There is
a garden in front of the house . The garden goes down to the beach and in Spring and
Summer there are flowers everywhere .I live alone with my dog , Boxer , but we have a
lot of visitors . my cityfriends often stay with us .
1. My house is over 105 years old .
2. I live in a big house near the mountains .
3. There are two bedrooms in my house .
4. The garden is in front of the house .
5. My friends never stay with me .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>
1. I get to work in half an hour .
=> It takes ………..
2. Do you have a cheaper computer than this ?
=> Is this ………..
3. How much is this dictionary ?
=> How much does ………..
4. There are over eight hundred stamps in Tim’s collection .
=> Tim’s collection ………..
5. She doesn’t have many toys as I .
=> She has ……….
6. My friends have more cadies than I .
=> I don’t ……….
Question 4 : Complete the sentences , using the words given .
1. Could / tell / how / get / police station / please ?
.
………
2. How much / cost / mail / letter / USA ?
………
3. In future / we / less work / more money / spend .
………
4. In / freetime / father / often / play / badminton .
………
5. How / father / always / travel / work / everyday ?
.
………
6. My mother / watch / T.V / the room / moment .
.
………
III. Homework :
Prepare unit 9 – A1
WEEK 19:
Preparing date : Wednesday , January 10th 2008
Period 55 :
UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY
Lesson 1 : A- A holiday in Nha Trang ( A1 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be used to the past simple tense . They will know
about some of the irregular verbs and regular verbs .
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>
- Delicious ( adj ) - To be : was / were
- To have => had - To buy => bought
- To take => took - To go => went
- To talk => talked - To return => returned
- To visit => visited
2. Grammar :
- The past simple tense .
III.Technique :
Using pictures , explanation , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork.
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , pictures , tape , cassette .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ Do you enjoy going on a picnic ?
+ Where do you often go on summer
vacations ?
+ What do you usually do during the
vacation ?
+ Have you ever been to Nha Trang ?
+ What do you think about Nha Trang ?
- Remark and lead in the new lesson .
2. Presentation :
- Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book ,
then introduce the situation of the lesson .
- Explain some new words to Ss :
+ Aquarium ( n ) :
+ Gift ( n ) :
+ Delicious ( adj ) :
+ To be : was / were ( past )
+ To have : had ( past )
+ To take : took ( past )
+ To go : went ( past )
+ To buy : bought ( past )
+ To talk : talked ( past )
+ To return : returned ( past )
+ To visit : visited ( past )
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually.
Checking technique : matching
- Ask Ss to match the words with their
meanings .
Gift Mua
Aquarium Ngon
Took Mãn quµ
Bought Cã
Delicious Trë vÒ
Went Hå c¸
Had Lêy / cÇm
Returned §i
- Greetings .
- Answer the questions .
- Look at the picture and listen
carefully .
- Listen and write down .
Guess the meaning , read new
words in chorus and individually
- Do exercise : matching
One student goes to the board
and match .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>
- Remark and give mark .
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to
the tape then answer the question :
What places did Robinsons visit and what
did they do there ?
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and repeat
after the tape .
- Call on some Ss to give their answers .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Correct their pronunciation .
- Introduce quickly the past simple tense ,
then ask Ss to find out the sentences in the
past .
- Ask them to read after the teacher these
sentences and verbs .
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and
number the sentences .
- Ask them to exchange the result with the
partner .
- Call on some Ss to give the answer in
front of the class .
- Remark and give the correct answer :
1. Liz went to Nha Trang .
2. Liz visited Tri Nguyen aquarium .
3. Liz bought souvenirs .
4. Liz returned to Ha noi .
5. Liz talked to Ba about her vacation .
3. Practice :
- Give some cues then ask Ss to practice
asking and answering .
+ Vacation / wonderful
+ Food / delicious
+ Things / expensive
+ People / friendly
+ Nha Trang / beautiful
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class .
- EX: How was the vacation ?
It was wonderful .
4. Production :
- Have Ss play a game : Guessing game
5. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
- Look at the book and listen
to the tape .
- Listen to the tape and read
after the tape .
- Give the answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice reading in front of
the class .
- Listen carefully and find out
the sentences in the past .
- Read after the teacher .
- Read the dialogue again and
number the sentences .
- Exchange the result .
- Give the answer in front of the
class .
- Write down in the notebooks
- Practice asking and
answering in pairs .
- Practice in front of the class .
- Play game :
EX: S1: Last vacation I was in
………
S2: Were you in …………?
S1: Yes, I was / No, I wasn’t .
- Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>
lines for each .
- Do exercise 1 at page 53 in workbook .
- Prepare A2.
Preparing date : Thursday , January 11th 2008
Period 56 :
<b> UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY </b>
Lesson 2 : A – A holiday in Nha Trang ( A2 )
I.The aims :
- Students read the passage for details about the Robinsons’ vacation and
practice Wh- questions in the past simple tense .
- They continue to practice reading skill.
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Shark ( n ) - Crab ( n )
- Dolphin ( n ) - Cap ( n )
- Turtle ( n ) - Exit ( n )
- To eat => ate - To see => Saw
- To think => thought - To wear => wore
2. Grammar :
The past simple tense .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
<b> T s Activities </b>’ <b> Ss Activities </b>’
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Palmanism :
Go , have , went , talk , bought , had , take ,
took , talked .
- Remark .
2.Pre- reading :
- Introduce the lesson : In the last period , we
heard Liz telling about her vacation in Nha
trang with her family . In today’s lesson ,
we will read the text about one of the most
interesting and memorable activities which
Liz and her family did during the vacation
– the visit to Tri Nguyen aquarium .
- Explain some new words to Ss.
- Greetings .
- Play a game in 2 groups .
- Listen carefully .
- Listen and write down .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>
+ Shark ( n ):
+ Dolphin ( n ) :
+ Turtle ( n ) :
+ Crab ( n ) :
+ Cap ( n ) :
+ Exit ( n ) :
+ To eat => ate ( past )
+ To see => saw ( past )
+ To wear => wore ( past )
+ To think => thought ( past )
Checking technique : What and where
* Matching :
Eat wore
See thought
Wear ate
think saw
- Remark .
Before reading the text , ask Ss to do exercise :
T or F prediction .
a. The Robinsons went to TN aquarium .
b. They saw many different types of fish .
c. Liz bought a little turtle .
d. They had lunch at a food stall.
e. Liz ate fish and crab .
- Ask Ss to discuss in groups .
- Call on some groups to give their
predictions.
3.While – reading :
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the
tape then check their predictions .
- Call some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answer :
a. T b. T c. F d. T e. F
- Have Ss read the text in front of the class .
- Correct the pronunciation .
- Ask Ss to read the text again and find out
the answers for the questions .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
a. Liz’s parents went to the aquarium with
her.
b. They saw many different types of fish ….
c. They bought a cap in the souvenir shop .
d. Yes, she did . She wore the cap all day .
e. Yes, they do . Mr and Mrs Robinson ate
fish and crab .
f. Because she remembered the beautiful fish
in the aquarium .
4.Post – reading :
Guess the meanings , read new
words in chorus and
individually , then copy down .
- Play a game : what and
where
- One student goes to the
board and match .
- Listen then do exercise .
- Work in groups .
- Give the predictions .
- Look at the book and listen
to the tape and check the
prediction .
- Read the text in front of the
class.
- Read the text again and find
out the answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class.
- Write down in the
notebooks .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>
- Ask Ss to tell the story of Liz’s trip to TN
aquarium , using the pictures .
- Call on some Ss to go to the board and tell
thestory , using the pictures .
- Remark and give marks .
5.Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 2
lines for each .
- Write the story about Liz’s trip .
- Do exercise 2 at page 53 in workbook .
retell the story .
- Some Ss go to the board and
tell the story .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Friday , January 12th 2008
Period 57 :
UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY
Lesson 3 : A- A holiday in Nha Trang ( A3 )
I.The aims :
The students will continue to learn about the past simple tense and know some more
regular and irregular verbs . They continue practicing listening skill.
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Unfortunately - Roadside restaurant
- Peaceful - Peanuts
- Calm - To drive => drove
2. Grammar :
The past simple tense .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .
V.Procedure :
<b> T s Activities </b>’ <b> Ss Activities </b>’
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Bingo
+ Ask Ss to write the verbs in the past simple
tense .
+ Read : Went , bought , had , took , talked ,
returned , visited , wore , ate , saw , thought .
+ Remark .
- Call one student to go to the board and retell
the story of Liz’s trip to Nha trang .
- Remark and give mark .
2. Pre – listening .
- Introduce the situation of the listening , then
ask Ss to read 5 pairs of sentences in the book
.
- Explain some new words to Ss .
+ Unfortunately ( adv ) >< Fortunately ( adv )
- Greeings .
- Play a game .
Write the verbs in the past
simple tense .
- One student goes to the
board and retell the
story .
- Listen to the teacher carefully
and read the sentences .
- Listen and write down .
Sentence a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j
Guess
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>
+ Peaceful ( adj ) :
+ Calm ( adj ) :
+ Roadside restaurant ( n ) :
+ Peanuts ( n ) :
+ To drive => drove ( past )
Checking technique : Rub out and remember .
- Ask Ss to read the sentences again and guess
which sentences they are going to hear .
- Call on some Ss to give their predictions .
3. While – listening :
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check their
prediction .( 2 times )
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Play the tape again and ask Ss to check the
answers.
- Correct and give the correct answers .
b, d , e , h , j
Exercise : Complete the passage .
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and
complete the passage .
Liz was excited as the bus … ……1 ..through the
countryside . Everything … ……..2 . calm and
peaceful. At 4 o’clock the bus … ……3 at a small
roadside restaurant . Mrs Robinson … ……..4 some
peanuts and an ice cream for Liz . The bus …5 . …. in
Ha noi at about 7 p.m .
- Call some Ss to give the results which they
have heard .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
1. drove 2. looked 3. stopped
4. bought 5. arrived
4.Post – listening :
- Have Ss work in pairs interviewing Liz about
her family’s trip back to Hanoi .
EX: + How did you travel back to Hanoi ?
+What did you see on the way back ?
+How did everything look ?
+Were you tired ?
+When did you arrive in Hanoi?
- Call on some pairs to role play in front of the
class .
- Remark .
5.Homework :
- Write a passage about Liz’s family’s trip back
Guess the meanings , read new
words in chorus and individually,
then copy down .
- Play a game : rub out and
remember .
- Read the sentences then
guess .
- Give the predictions .
- Listen to the tape and check the
predictions .
- Give the answers .
- Listen to the tape again
and check the answers .
- Listen and copy down .
- Listen to the tape and
complete the passage .
- Give the answers .
- Copy down .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>
to Hanoi ( 8 to 10 sentences )
- Do exercise 3 at page 54 in workbook .
- Prepare part 4 ,5 .
<b>WEEK 20 </b>
Preparing date : Wednesday , January 17th 2008
Period 58:
<b> UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY </b>
Lesson 4 : A- A holiday in Nha Trang ( A4,5 )
I.The aims :
The Students will read Ba’s diary to understand the details and talk about past
activities
Students cotinue to practice reading skill.
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- To keep in touch - To teach => taught
- To rent => rented - To improve => improved
- To move => moved
2. Grammar :
The past simple tense .
III.Technique :
Explanation , brainstorming , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook . tape , cassette , sub- board .
<b>V.Procedure </b>
<b> T s Activities </b>’ <b> Ss Activities </b>’
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Networks
Looked bought
- Devide the class into 2 teams
- Remark .
- Greetings .
- Play a game : Networks
2 teams take part in the game .
- Students go to the board
and write .
<b> Regular </b>
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>
2.New activities :
a) Read Ba’s diary .
- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then
explain some new words :
+ To keep in touch ( v ) :
+ To rent ( v ) => rented ( past )
+ To move ( v ) => moved ( past )
+ To teach ( v ) => taught ( past )
+ to improve ( v ) => improved ( past )
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Correct their pronunciation .
Exercise : T or F prediction
1) The Robinsons are American .
2) Mr Robinson works at a hospital in Hanoi .
3) They rented a house next door to Ba’s .
4) They moved to a new apartment last week .
5) Liz and Ba are the same age .
- Ask Ss to work in groups .
- Call on some groups to give their predictions
- Ask Ss to read Ba’s diary then check their
prediction .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers in front
of the class .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
1.T 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. T
- Call on some Ss to read the diary aloud .
- Ask Ss to read the sentences from a to g ,
then read the diary again in order to correct
the false sentences .
- Have Ss exchange the results with the
partner .
- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write
the true sentences .
- Correct and give the correct answers .
a) Liz lived next door to Ba .
b) Liz learned Vietnamese in Viet nam .
c) Ba collects stamps.
d) Liz’s aunt lives in New York .
e) The Robinsons moved to the other side of hanoi .
f) The Robinsons moved . Now Ba is sad / unhappy .
g) Ba will see Liz next week .
Play with words .
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and
say about these activities .
- Ask them to look at the book and listen to
the tape .
- Have Ss read after the tape .
- Call on some Ss to read aloud .
3.Consolidation :
- Listen to the teacher and
write down .
Guess the meanings , read new
words in chorus and individually
then copy down .
Do exercise in groups .
- Give the predictions .
- Read the diary and
check the predictions .
- Give the answers .
- Read the diary aloud .
- Correct the false
sentences .
- Exchange the result with
the partner .
- Go to the board and
write .
- Copy down .
- Look at the pictures and
say about them .
- Listen to the tape .
- Read after the tape .
- Read aloud .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>
- Ask Ss to imagine Liz is their new friend .
Write a letter to one of their friends to tell
him or her about Liz and her family .
EX: Dear………,
I’m glad to tell you that I have a new friend . Her
name is Liz . She is American . ……….
- call on some Ss to read their letters in front
of the class .
- Remark .
4.Homework :
- Write again the letter in the exercise book .
- Do exercise 4 at page 54 in workbook .
- Prepare part B1,2.
.
- Read the letter in front
of the class .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Thursday , January 18th 2008
Period 59 :
<b> UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY </b>
Lesson 5 : B- Neighbors ( B1,2 )
I.The aims :
After the lesson , the students will practice the past simple tense in negative and
interrogative forms and short answers to talk about past activities .
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Hairdresser - Neighbor
- Dressmaker - Material
-To make => made - To cut => cut
2.Grammar :
The past simple tense in negative and interrogative .
III.Technique :
Explanation , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board , picture .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities <b> Ss Activities </b>’
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Pelmanism
come , improve , wore , came , received ,
improved , receive , wear , teach , taught .
- Demonstrate the group which is winer .
2. New activities :
A. Listen . then practice with a partner .
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess
- Greetings .
- Play a game : Pelmanism
- Look at the picture and
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>
what they are doing .
- Introduce : Lan and Hoa are friends . they
are talking . Now you listen to the tape and
tell me what they are talking about .
- Play the tape for Ss .
- Explain some new words to Ss :
+ Hairdresser ( n ):
+ Dressmaker ( n ) :
+ Neighbor ( n ) :
+ Material ( n ) :
+ To make ( v ) => made
+ To cut ( v ) => cut
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
* Checking technique : Rub out and remember .
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again then
answer the question .
- Correct and give the correct answer :
They are talking about Hoa’s hair , dress .
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read after
the tape .
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue.
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue
in front of the class .
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find
out the answers for the questions .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
a) She is a hairdresser .
b) She is a dressmaker .
Answer :
- Introduce the form of short answers .
- Make model sentences :
+ Did Hoa buy the dress ?
No, she didn’t .
+ Did her aunt cut her hair ?
Yes , she did .
- Ask Ss to practice in pairs using the
information in the dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Remark .
3. Consolidation :
_ repeat the form of short answer of the past simple
tense .
- Have Ss play a game : Guessing game .
EX: Yesterday I went to a ……and I bought a/ an
guess .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Listen to the tape .
- Listen and write down .
Guess meanings , read new
words in chorus and
individually , then copy
down .
- Play a game : Rub out
and remember .
- Listen to the tape again ,
then answer the question .
- Read after the tape .
- Work in pairs .
-Practice in front of the class.
- Read the dialogue again
and find out the answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class .
- Copy down .
- Listen .
- Listen and write down .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Play a game : Guessing
game
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>
..
…
+ Did you go to ………..?
+ Did you buy ………….?
- Remark .
4. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by making
sentences with them .
- Do exercises 1,2 at page 55, 56 in
workbook .
- Prepare part 3,4 .
Write the sentences in a paper
sheet .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Friday , January 19th 2008
Period 60 :
UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY
Lesson 6 : B – Neighbors ( B3,4 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will read the text for details to understand Hoa’s
sewing work and further practice in WH- questions to talk about past activities .
Practice reading and writing skills .
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Hobby - To sew
- Sewing machine - To decide => decided
- Cushion - To try => tried
- Useful - To fit => fitted
2.Grammar :
The simple past tense .
Wh – questions to talk about past activities .
III.Technique :
Explanation , asking and answering , pairwork and groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , casstte , sub- board , picture .
V.Procedure :
<b> T s Activities </b>’ Ss’Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask Ss some questions :
- Greetings .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>
+ What did you do lastnight ?
+ Did you watch TV ?
+ Did you do your homework ?
+ What time did you go to bed ?
.
………
- Remark .
2.New activities :
A. Read . Then answer .
- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then
explain some new words :
+ Hobby ( n ) :
+ Sewing machine ( n ) :
+ Cushion ( n ) :
+ Useful ( adj ) :
+ To sew ( v ) :
+ To decide ( v ) => decided ( past )
+ To try (v ) => tried ( past )
+ To fit ( v ) => fitted ( past )
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Correct their pronunciation .
Checking technique : What and where .
Exercise : T or F prediction .
1) Hoa decided to learn how to sew .
2) She didn’t buy some material.
3) She made a cushion for her armchair .
4) Next, She made a shirt .
5) It was blue with white flowers on it .
- Have Ss do exercise in groups
- Call on some groups to give their predictions
- Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape
and check their predictions .
- Call on some Ss to give the results .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. F
- Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud .
- Ask Ss to read the passage again and find out
the answers for the questions .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front
of the class .
- Correct and give the correct answers
a) She learned how to use a sewing machine .
b) She made a cushion for her armchair first .
c) It was blue and white .
d) Next , she made a skirt .
e) It was green with white flowers on it .
f) It looked very pretty .
g) She tried it on but it didn’t fit .
h) Hoa’s neighbor helped her .
i) Finally, It fitted very well.
- Listen then write down .
Guess the meaning , read
new words in chorus and
individually , then copy
down .
- Play a game : what and
where .
- Work in groups .
- Give the predictions .
- Listen to the tape and
check the predictions .
- Give the results .
- Read the passage aloud .
- Read the passage again
and find out the answers
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class .
- Copy down .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>
B. Write . Put the verbs in brackets in the simple past
tense .
- Introduce the aim of the exercise to Ss .
- Ask Ss to read the sentences .
- Ask them to complete the sentences with the
form of the verbs in the past simple tense .
- Have Ss exchange the results with the
partners .
- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write
down .
- Correct and give the correct answer :
Watched – bought – cut – used – decided –
was – made – was – wasn’t – helped – fitted
3.Consolidation:
- Repeat the form of Wh- questions :
Wh- + did + S + Verb….?
EX: Where did you buy this shirt ?
I bought it in the shop .
What did you do lastnight ?
I watched TV .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and
answering using Wh – questions .
- Remark .
4.Homework :
- Learn by heart part remember by making
sentences with them .
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 56,57 in workbook .
- Prepare language focus .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Read the sentences in
the book .
- Complete the sentences .
- Exchange the results
with the partner.
- Go to the board and
write down .
- Copy down .
- Listen to the teacher
carefully .
- Work in pairs asking
answering using wh-
questions to talk about
past activities .
- Write homework .
<b>WEEK 21 </b>
Preparing date : Wednesday , January 24th 2008
Period 61 :
<b> LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 </b>
I.The aims :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>
By the end of the lesson , Ss will practice the past simple tense , prepositions of
places , “ How much “ “ How far “ to talk about the price and distance , comparatives
with more , less and fewer .
II. Language content :
- The past simple tense .
- How much is it ?
- Prepositions of places .
- Comparatives .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork ,
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , sub- board .
V.Procedure :
<b> T s Activities </b>’ <b> Ss Activities </b>’
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask Ss some questions about what they did
lastweek .
EX : What did you do last weekend ?
Did you go to the library ?
Did you visit you grandparents ?
.
…………
2. Consolidation and practice :
A. How much is it ?
a) Work with a partner . Read the dialogue .
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .
- Ask ss to repeat the structure to ask and
answer about the price .
-Ex : How much is the green dress?
= How much does the green dress cost ?
b) Now make similar dialogues .
- Ask Ss to use the information in the table to
make similar dialogues .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class.
- Correct the mistake .
2) Prepositions :
- Have Ss give the prepositions of places .
- Ask Ss to look at the map . Write the
location of each store .
EX: The clothing store is on Hai Ba trung street .
- Greetings .
- Answer the questions .
- Read the dialogue in
pairs.
- Give the structure asking
answering the price :
+ How much is/ are + S ?
It/ They + is / are +….
+ How much + do / does + S
+ cost ?
=> It costs / They cost …..
- Make similar dialogues .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class.
S1: How much is the blue hat ?
S2: It’s 15,000dong .
S1: What about the yellow hat ?
S2: It’s 12,000 dong .
- Give the prepositions of
places.
- Write the location of each
store .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>
It’s near the shoe store to the right .
- Call some Ss to say about the location of
the stores.
- Remark .
- Call one student to give the structure of
asking and answering the distance .
- Ask Ss to use the information in the table to
work in pairs : one asks and one answers .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class.
3) Past simple tense :
a) Write the past form of the verbs .
-Ask Ss to write the past form of the verbs .
- Call on one student to go to the board and
write down .
- Correct and give the correct answer :
+ Buy => bought
+ help => helped
+ Remember => remembered
+ take => took
+ send => sent
think => thought
talk => talked
b) Complete the sentences . Use the words in the
box .
- Ask Ss to use the words in the box to
complete the sentences .
- Call on some Ss to do exercise .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
1) Played
2) Talked
3) bought
4) Worked
5) Sent
- Ask Ss to write down .
4) Simple tenses :
- Have Ss to look at Nga’s diary then
complete the dialogue .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to role play in front of
- Read the location of the stores.
+ The bookstore is on Hue street.
It’s between the restaurant and the
minimart .
.
………
- Give the structure of
asking and answering the
distance .:
How far is it from…… ……to .?
It’s about ……..
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the class.
S1: How far is it from the shoe
store to the minimart ?
S2: It’s 500 meters .
S1: How far is it from the clothing
store to the bookstore ?
S2: It’s 450 meters .
.
………
- Write past form of the
verbs .
- Write on the board .
- Write in the notebook .
- Complete the sentences
with the given words .
- Do exercise in front of the
class.
- Write down .
- Complete the dialogue.
- Work in pairs .
- Role play in front of the
class .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>
theclass .
- Correct the mistake and give the key :
Nga: Everyday I clean my room , help my mom and
study English .
Minh : What did you do yesterday ?
Nga : I cleaned my room, helped my mom, studied
E , watched TV , played volleyball and stayed at
Hoa’s house.
Minh: How about tomorrow?
Nga : I’ll study E, clean my room, help my mom,
see a movie, visit my grandmother and buy new
shoes .
5)More , less , fewer .
- Ask Ss to repeat the use of more , less and
fewer .
- Ask Ss to look at the two refregerators and
write sentences , using more , less and
fewer .
- Call on some Ss to go to the board and
write down .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
+ Before there were more bananas , Now there are
fewer bananas .
+ Before there was more milk . Now there was less
milk .
3.Further practice :
- Have Ss do test yourself in workbook.
4.Consolidation :
- Repeat the structures which Ss have learnt .
5. Homework :
- Redo all exercises in the exercise book .
- Prepare part A1- unit 10.
- Repeat the use of more,
less and fewer .
- Look at two refregeratos
and write sentences .
- Go to the board and write
down .
- Copy down .
- Do test yourself 3 .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Thursday , January 25th 2008
Period 62 :
UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE
Lesson 1: A- Personal hygiene ( A1 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will read a letter to understand the details about
Hoa and her family . they will cotinue to practice the simple present and the simple
past tenses .
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Harvest - To take morning exercises
- Helpful - To iron
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>
2.Grammar :
- The simple present tense
- The simple past tense .
III.Technique :
Brainstorming , explanation , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , picture.
V. Procedure :
<b>T s Activities </b>’ <b>Ss Activities </b>’
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Brainstorming :
Likes…..
Class….
From….
Lives with….. Live in…..
- Ask Ss to discuss about Hoa in groups .
- Call on 2 groups to demonstrate their
discussion in front of the class .
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2.New activities :
- Introduce the lesson then explain some new
words :
+ Harvest ( n ):
+ Helpful ( adj ) :
+ To take morning exercises :
+ To hope ( v ):
+ To iron ( v ):
+ Probably ( adv ) :
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Correct their pronunciation .
- Have Ss play a game : what and where in
order to check new words .
- Ask Ss to order the sentences of Hoa’s
mom’s letter .
a. Your dad and I hope you’re fine .
b. I hope you’re taking care of yourself .
c. I received a letter from your aunt last week .
d. I miss you a lot .
e. Don’t forget to write .
f. Your grand father talks about you a lot .
- Call some Ss to give their predictions .
- Ask Ss to look at the letter and listen to the
tape , then check their predictions .
- Greetings .
Work in groups .
- Demonstrate the
discussion .
- Listen and write down .
Guess the meanings , read
new words in chorus and
individually the copy down
in the notebook .
- Play a gmae .
- Order the sentences .
- Give their predictions .
- Look at the book and
listen to the tape , then
check the predictions .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>
- Call some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
1- a 2- f 3- c 4- b 5- d 6- e
- Call on some Ss to read the letter in front of
the class .
- Correct their pronunciation .
- Ask Ss to read the letter again then find out
the answers for the questions in the book .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
Have Ss play a game called lucky numbers :
1) Who helps Hoa’s parents on the farm ?
2) LN
3) What does Hoa’s mother want her to do?
4) Why are Hoa’s parents busy ?
5) LN
6) What does Hoa’s mother want her not to do ?
7) How is Hoa different now ?
8) When will they go to Hanoi ?
- Remark and ask Ss to write the answers in
the notebooks .
3.Consolidation:
- Ask Ss to imagine they are Hoa . Write a
letter to her mother .
- Go around the class and provide the help
- Have Ss exchange the letter with their
partners .
- Call on some Ss to read their letters in front
of the class .
- Correct the common mistakes .
- Remark .
4.Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Rewrite the letter in the exercisebook .
- Do exercise 1 at page 61 in workbook .
- Prepare part 2.
- Give the answers .
_ Read the letter aloud .
- Read the letter again to
find out the answers for
the questions .
- Work in pairs .
Play a game : lucky numbers .
( Answer the questions )
- Write the answers in the
notebooks .
- Write a letter to Hoa’s
mother .
- Exchange the letter with
the partner .
- Read the letters in front
of the class .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Friday , January 26th 2008
Period 63 :
UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE
Lesson 2: A- Personal hygiene ( A2,3 )
I.The aims :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>
The students continue to practice about personal hygiene through the listening
and reading the diary .
Practice listening and speaking skills .
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- To polish - To comb
- To change - Sandals
- Pants - To drink => drank
2.Grammar :
Review the past simple tense
III.Technique :
Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
<b> T s Activities </b>’ <b> Ss Activities </b>’
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare .
-Ask Ss to find the past tense of irregular verbs
- Remark .
2.New Activities :
A. Listen :
Pre- listening :
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures then
introduce the aim of the lesson to Ss .
- Explain some new words to Ss .
+ To polish ( v ) :
+ To change ( v ):
+ To comb ( v ) :
+ Pants ( n ) :
+ Sandals ( n ) :
+ To drink ( v ) => drank ( past )
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Ask Ss to predict the order of the pictures .
- Call on some Ss to give their predictions .
While- listening :
- Play the tape for Ss and ask them to check
their predictions . ( 2 times )
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Play the tape again and check .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
1. a 2.e 3. f 4. d 5. g 6. c 7. h 8. b
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
- 2 groups take part in the
game .
Went, came , ate , saw ,
gave , did , took , made ,
was , bought , were ,
sent , cut , won , had .
- Look at the pictures
carefully and listen to the
teacher .
Guess meanings , read new words
in chorus and imdividually then
copy down .
- Predict the order of the
pictures .
- Give the predictions .
- Listen to the tape and
check the predictions .
- Give the answers .
- Listen to the tape again
and check the answers .
- Copy down .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>
Post – listening :
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and tell what
Hoa did yesterday .
EX: Yesterday , Hoa got up, she took a shower and
put on her clothes ……….
- Call on some Ss to tell what Hoa did
yesterday in front of the class .
- Correct the mistakes if necessary .
B. Read Nam’s diary .
- Ask Ss to look at Nam’s diary and tell
about Nam’s daily routines .
- Call on one student to read Nam’s diary .
- Have Ss work in pairs asking answering
about Nam’s daily routines .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class .
- Ask them to write a diary about themselves
based on Nam’s diary .
- Ask them to exchange their writing with
the partner .
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and
answering about themselves .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class.
- Remark .
3.Consolidation :
- Ask Ss to write about what they did
yesterday .
- Call on some Ss to read their writing in
front of the class.
- Remark .
4.Homework :
- Write a passage about Hoa’s activites using
the pictures in the book .
- Do exercise 3 at page 62 in workbook .
- Prepare part 4 .
- Look at the pictures and
tell what Hoa did
yesterday .
- Some Ss tell about Hoa in
front of the class .
- Read Nam’s diary .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class.
- Write a diary based on Nam’s .
- Exchange the writing
with the partner .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Write about yesterday’s
activities .
- Read the writing in front
of the class .
- Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>
WEEK 22 :
Preparing date : Wednesday , January 31st 2008
Period 64 :
UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE
Lesson 3 : A – Personal hygiene ( 4 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letter to reply and talk about
the routine and hygiene .
Practice writing skill .
II. Language content :
- Review the simple present tense and past simple tense .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , asking and answering , Pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , sub- board .
V.Procedure :
<b> T s Activities </b>’ <b> Ss Activities </b>’
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask Ss some questions about themselves :
+ What time do you get up everyday ?
+ What time do you have breakfast ?
+ What time do you go to bed ?
..
…………
2.New activities
- Ask Ss to talk about Hoa’s mom letter .
- Give some cues or questions :
+ Did Hoa get a letter from her mother ?
+ Did her mom visit her after the harvest ?
+ Can Hoa take care of herself ?
+ Does she get up early every morning ?
+ Des she go to bed late ?
+ Will she write to her mom soon ?
- Greetings .
- Answer the questions .
_ Talk about Hoa’s mom letter .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class .
- Remark .
- Ask Ss to look at the letter in the book
then complete the letter with the suitable
words .
- Have Ss exchange the result with the
partner .
- Call on some Ss to give the result in front
of the class .
- Correct the mistake and give the correct
answers .
Was , having , show , take , get , go , wash ,
iron , eating , told , see/ meet , go .
- Ask Ss to write down .
- Ask Ss to work in groups of four writing
the letter on the posters .
- Call on some groups to read the letter in
front of the class .
- Ask Ss to put their letters on the board
then compare their work .
3.Consolidation :
- Ask Ss to write a letter to their penpal
telling what they do everyday .
- Go around class and provide help .
- Call on some Ss to read their letters in
front of the class .
- Remark .
4.Homework :
- Write the letter in the notebook .
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 63 in workbook .
- Prepare part B1 .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class.
- Complete the letter .
- Exchange the result with
the partner .
- Give the answers in front
of the class .
- Copy down .
- Work in groups of four .
- Read the letters in front of the
class .
- Put the letters on the
board .
- Write a letter to a penpal .
- Read the letter aloud .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Wednesday , January 31st 2008
Period 65 :
<b> UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE </b>
Lesson 4 : B- A bad tooth ache ( B1 )
I.The aims :
After the lesson , Ss will be able to tell about a visit to the dentist . They will be used
to asking and answering about this topic .
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>
2.Grammar :
- The simple present and past tense
- What’s the matter ? = What’s wrong ?
III.Technique :
Explanation , eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , picture .
V Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Hangman
Matter , Worry , tooth , Feel
- Remark .
2.New activities :
- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ What will you do if you have a tooth ache?
+ When you go to the dentist , what will the
dentist do ?
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer
the question : What’s the matter with
Minh , the boy in the picture ?
- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then
explain some new words to Ss .
+ Dentist ( n ) :
+ An appointment ( n ) :
+ Scared ( adj ) :
+ Cavity ( n ) :
+ To fill ( v ) :
+ To hate ( v ) = to dislike ( v )
+ To hurt ( v ) :
+ Drill ( n ) :
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
* Checking technique : Slap the board .
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and answer the
questions :
+ What is Minh going to do at 10:30 ?
+What happened to Hoa last week ?
+ How did the doctor help Hoa ?
- Play the tape for Ss .
- Play the tape again and ask Ss to read after
the tape .
- Ask Ss to answer the questions above .
- Correct and give the correct answers .
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the
dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in
front of the class .
- Correct their pronunciation .
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
- Answer the questions .
- Look at the picture then
answer the questions .
- Listen and write down .
- Guess the meaning , read
new words in chorus and
individually , then copy
down .
- Play a game : Slap the
board .
- Two groups take part in
the game .
- Listen to the tape , then
find the answers .
- Listen to the tape .
- Read after the tape .
- Answer the questions .
- Listen .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
Find someone who Name
.has a toothache ?
…
.likes going to the dentist ?
…
is scared of seeing the dentist ?
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find
out the answers for the questions .
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and
answering the questions .
- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers
1.Why did Hoa go to the dentist last week ?
2What is wrong with Minh ?
3.LN
4.Does Minh like going to the dentist ?
How do you know ?
5.Are you scared of seeing the dentist ?
6.LN
7.What did the dentist do with Hoa’s toothache ?
8.What did you do the last time you had a bad
toothache ?
9.LN
10.How does Minh feel after talking with Hoa ?
- Demonstrate the result .
- remark .
- Ask Ss to write the answers in the
notebooks .
3.Consolidation :
- Have Ss play a game : Find someone
who?
EX : S1: Do you have a toothache ?
S2 : Yes / No
S1 : Do you like going to the dentist ?
- Remark .
4.Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Do exercise 1 at page 63 in workbook .
- Prepare part B2,3 .
- Read the dialogue again
and find out the answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Play a game in groups .
Answer the questions .
- Write the answers in the
notebooks .
- Play a game
Ask and asnwer in front of the
class .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Thursday , February 1st 2008
Period 66:
UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE
Lesson 5 : B- A bad tooth ache ( B2,3 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about Dr Lai’s job . They
continue to practice about the topic of toothache .
Practice listening and reading skills .
II. Language content :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>
1.Vocabulary :
- To explain - To remind
- Sensibly - Surgery
- To smile - To check
- To notice
2.Grammar :
Review : the simple present tense
III.Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board
2.New activities :
a) Listen and answer
- Introduce the situation of the listening .
- Ask Ss to read the questions in the book
then guess the answers for the questions .
- Call on some groups to give their answers.
- Play the tape for Ss checking their
predictions .
- Explain some new words to Ss.
+ To explain ( v ) :
+ To remind ( v ) :
+ Sensibly ( adv ) :
+ Surgrey ( n ) :
+ To smile ( v ) :
+ To notice ( v ) :
+ Serious ( adj ) :
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Play the tape again for Ss.
- Ask Ss to give the answers .
- Play the tape again for Ss checking the
answers .
- Correct and give the correct answers .
a. Dr Lai is a dentist .
b. She wears uniform to work .
c. Most children feel scared when they come to
see Dr Lai .
d. She explains what will happen. She gives them
advice .
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
- Two groups take part in
the game .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Read the questions in the
book and guess the
answers ( work in groups)
- Give the predictions .
- Listen and check the
predictions .
- Listen and write down .
Read new words in chorus
and individually , guess
meaning then copy down .
- Listen to the tape to check
the predictions .
- Give the answers .
- Check the answers .
- Write the answers in the
notebooks .
Dentist Scared Toothach
e
Appointmen
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>
- Ask Ss to write down .
b) Listen and read .
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer
the questions :
+ What is the matter with Minh ?
+ How does he feel ?
+ What is the doctor doing ?
+ Why does that happen to Minh ?
- Call on some Ss to give their answers .
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to
the tape ( two times )
- Have Ss read the text in silent .
- Call on some Ss to read the text in front of
the class .
- Ask Ss to complete the story with suitable
words .
- Have Ss exchange the results with their
partners .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers in
front of the class .
- Correct the mistakes then give the answer
key :
Minh is very nervous and Dr Lai notices this . She
smiles to Minh and tells him not to worry . She
explains one of his teeth has a cavity . He has to
brush them regularly . After Dr Lai fills his tooth ,
Minh leaves . He is very pleased
- Call on some Ss to read the completed the
story aloud .
2. Consolidation :
Repeat the content of the lesson .
3. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Do exercises 2,3 at page 65 in workbook .
- Prepare part 4,5 .
- Look at the picture and
answer the questions .
- Give the answers .
- Look at the book and
listen to the tape .
- Read the text in silent .
- Read the text aloud .
- Complete the story with
the suitable words .
- Exchange the result with
the partner .
- Give the answers in front
of the class .
- Listen and write down .
- Read the story aloud .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>
<b>WEEK 23 </b>
Preparing date : Wednesday , February 7th 2008
Period 67 :
<b> UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGYIENE </b>
Lesson 6 : B- A bad tooth ache ( B 4, 5 )
I.The aims :
The students continue to practice speaking about health and hygiene , using
simple present tense .
II. Language content :
- Practice vocabulary about health and hygiene .
- The present simple tense .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , using pictures .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , pictures ,
V.Procedure
<b> T s Activities </b>’ <b> Ss Activities </b>’
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Networks
Take morning exercises
- Call on students from 2 groups to go to the
board and write down .
- Remark.
2.New activities :
a) Ask and answer qurstions with a partner . Use
the words to help you .
- Ask Ss to tell what happenned to Minh .
- Introduce the way to make sentence and
the question : why and the answer to Ss .
- Make example :
Minh’s tooth hurts .
Why ?
Because he has a cavity .
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and model
then work in pairs asking and answering
based on the pictures and the words given .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
- Greetings .
- Play a game
- 2 groups take part in the
game .
- Go to the board and write
down .
- Tell what happened to
Minh .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>
front of the class .
- Correct the mistake and give the correct
answer .
b. Minh is nervous .
Why ?
Because he is seeing the dentist .
c. the cavity is not serious .
Why ?
Because it is small.
d. Minh is happy .
Why ?
Because his teeth are OK.
- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
b) Write . Complete this poster with a partner .
- Introduce the situation and the aim of the
exercise to Ss.
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and
examples.
- Have Ss look at the pictures and write
sentences as model .
- Ask them to exchange the results with the
partner.
- Call on some Ss to give their ideas in front
of the class .
- Correct the mistake .
3.Consolidation :
- Ask Ss to work in groups discussing the
question: What should we do and what
shouldn’t we do if we want to have
healthy teeth?
- Go around class and provide the help.
- Call on some Ss from some groups to
present their ideas in front of the class.
- Remark and give marks .
4. Homework :
- Write the poster : what should we do and
shouldn’t do if we have healthy teeth ?
- Do exercise 4 at page 65 in workbook .
- Prepare unit 11 – A1
class .
- Listen and write down .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Look at the pictures and the
example .
- Write sentences .
- Exchange the result with
the partner .
- Give the ideas in front of
the class.
- Write down .
- Work in groups .
- Demonstrate their ideas
in front of the class.
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Thursday , February 8th 2008
Period 68 :
UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY.
Lesson 1 : A- A check – up ( A1 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the content of the
dialogue and give the requests and the reponses .
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>
- Height - Weight
- Temperature - To take one’s temperature
- Scales - Normal
2.Grammar :
- The structure : Would you + V ?
- Review the simple present tense
III.Technique :
Explanation, using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ Do you eat much candy ?
+ Do you often eat ice- creams?
+ How often do you brush your teeth ?
+ If you have healthy teeth , what should
you do ?
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2. New activities:
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess :
Where are they ?
What are they doing ?
- Introduce the situation of the lesson ,
then explain some new words to Ss .
+ Medical check- up ( n ) :
+ Medical record ( n ) :
+ Height ( n ) :
+ To measure ( v ) :
+ To weigh ( v ) :
+ Temperrature ( n ) :
+ To take one’s temperrature
+ Scales ( n ) :
+ Normal ( adj ) :
+ Structure : Would you open your mouth ,
please ?
Would you + V ?
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
Checking technique : Rub out and remember .
- Have Ss guess the content of the
dialogue and order the sentences .
- Call on some Ss to give their predictions
in front of the class .
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to
the tape then check their order .
- Ask them to read the dialogue again and
- Greetings .
- Answer the questions .
- Look at the picture and
answer the questions .
- Listen to the teacher .
read new words in chorus and
individually , guess the meanings ,
then copy down .
- Play a game : rub out and
remember .
- Guess the order of the
sentences .
- Give the predictions in
front of the class .
- Look at the books and
listen to the tape .
- Read the dialogue and
check the predictions .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>
give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
1.F 2.D 3. C 4. G 5. E 6. A 7. H 8. B
- Ask Ss to write the correct answer in the
notebooks.
- - Have Ss work in pairs reading the
dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to practice reading in
front of the class .
- Correct their pronunciation .
Comprehension questions :
-Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers
1. What were the students of QT school doing ?
2. LN
3. Who was doing the medical check – up ?
4. What did the nurse do ?
5. LN
6. What was Hoa’s temperature ? Was it normal?
7. What was her height ?
8. What was her weight ? How heavy was she ?
- Remark .
3.Consolidation :
- Ask Ss to use the structure : Would you + V ?
to make the sentences by playing a game :
Noughts and crosses .
!Unexpected End of Formula
- Make example :
Would you open your mouth , please ?
- Remark .
4.Homework:
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 66 in workbook .
- Prepare part 2, 3 .
- Write the correct answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Play a game :
Answer the questions
2 groups take part in the game .
- Play a game :Noughts and
crosses
Make sentences with the cues .
- Write homework .
Prepaing date : Friday , February 9th 2008
Period 69 :
<b> UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY </b>
Lesson 2 : A- A check – up ( A 2 , 3 )
I.The aims :
Take Open your Fill in the form
temperature mouth
Get on the Measure your
Sit down scales height
Wait in the
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>
By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and
practice asking and answering about the personal information .
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
Review the vocabulary about health .
Male - Female
2. Grammar :
The simple present tense .
Structure : How + adj + to be + S ?
What + to be + N ?
III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , casstte .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board
- Demonstrate the group which wins the
game .
2.New activities :
A. Listen . Then write the missing words .
- Introduce the situation of the lesson .
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the
missing words .
- Have Ss listen to the tape for the first time.
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and find
out the words to fill in the blanks .
- Ask Ss to exchange the results with the
partners .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers in
front of the class .
- Have Ss listen to the tape again and check
their answers .
- Correct and give the correct answers .
Doctor : I want to ask you a few questions before I
start, Hoa . How old are you ?
Hoa : Fourteen .
Doctor : And your height is one meter 50
centimeters ?
Hoa : No. I think I’m shorter . The nurse measured
me .
- Greetings .
- Play a game : Slap the
board .
2 groups take part in the
game .
- Clap the hands .
- Listen to the teacher
carefully .
- Read the dialogue and
guess the missing words .
- Listen to the tape
carefully .
- Exchange the result with
the partner .
- Give the answers in front
of the class .
- Listen to the tape again
and check the answers .
- Listen and copy down .
Normal Medical record
Medical check up <sub>Measure</sub>
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>
Doctor : Oh . How tall are you ?
Hoa : One meter 45 centimeters .
Doctor : I will ask the nurse to check your height
again . How heavy are you ?
Hoa : I think I’m 42 kilograms .
Doctor : No. It says on your form that you’re 40
kilograms .
- Ask Ss to practice the dialogue with the
partner .
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue
in front of the class .
- Correct their pronunciation .
B. Ask and answer questions with a partner .
- Introduce the situation of the exercise to
Ss and explain some questions :
+ Which school does he go to ?
+ What is his surname ?
+ How tall is he ? = What’s his height ?
+ What’s his weight ? = How heavy is he ?
- Ask Ss to work in pairs : One is A , the
other is B asking and asnwering the
information to complete the medical
record .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Correct the mistakes if necessary .
- Ask Ss to complete the form in their
notebooks .
3.Consolidation :
- Have Ss play a game : Survey .
- Ask Ss to work in groups : Ask their
friends in order to have information and
write in the form .
- Call on some groups to practice in front of
the class .
4.Homework :
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 67 in workbook .
- Prepare part B1 .
- Work in pairs reading the
dialogue .
- Practice the dialogue in
front of the class .
- Listen to the teacher and
write down .
- Work in pairs .
- Some pairs pratice in
front of the class .
- Complete the form in the
notebooks .
- Play a game .
- Work in groups .
- Practice in front of the
class.
- Write homework .
<b>WEEK 24 </b>
Preparing date : Wednesday, February 21st 2008
Period 70 :
<b> UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY </b>
Lesson 3 : B – What was wrong with you ? ( B1 )
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and asnwer questios about
sickness and further practice in the past simple , question forms and negative forms .
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Bad cold - Sick note
- Headache - Virus
- Stomachache - Flu
2. Grammar :
- The simple past tense : question forms and negative forms .
- Structures : What is/ was wrong with SB ?
I have/ had a headache .
She has / had a bad cold .
III.Technique :
Explanation , eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask Ss some questions about themselves .
EX: How tall are you ?
What’ s your weight ?
How old are you ?
………..
- Remark and give marks .
2.Presentation :
- Introduce the situation of the lesson the
explain some new words and structures :
+ To have a bad cold :
a headache .
a virus .
flu .
a stomachache .
+ To be sick = to be ill .
+ Sick note ( n ) :
Have Ss play a game
Structures : What is / was wrong with SB ?
EX: What was wrong with you ?
I had a headache .
3.Practice :
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer
the questions :
+ Look at balloon 1 : Lan wasnot there . She
was absent . What do you think Mr. Tan is
asking Lan? What was wrong with her ?
( look at balloon 2 )
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer
the questions .
- Call on some Ss to answer the questions in
front of the class .
- Greetings .
- Answer T’s questions .
- Listen to the teacher and
copy down .
Read new words in chorus and
individually , guess meanings
then copy down .
- Make sentences :
What was wrong with her ?
She had a bad cold .
- Look at the pictures and
answer the questions .
- Read the dialogue in
silent to find out the
answers .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>
- Have Ss listen to the tape and look at the
books then check the answers.
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue
in front of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and
answering the questions in the books .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer the
questions in front of the class .
- Correct the mistake and give the correct
answers :
a) Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because she
had a bad cold .
b) She had a headache .
c) Mr. Tan tells Lan to stay inside at recess .
d) The doctor said that Lan had a virus .
e) The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note .
- Ask Ss to copy down .
4.Production :
- Give some cues and ask Ss to practice in
pairs .
You / a cold . She / toothache .
Lan / headache . He / flu .
Ba / Stomachache .
Make example :
S1 : What was wrong with you ?
S2: I had a cold .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class .
- Remark .
5. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 71 in workbook .
- Prepare part 2,3 .
- Give the answers in front
of the class .
- Listen to the tape and
check the answers .
- Work in pairs reading the
dialogue .
- Practice reading the
dialogue in front of the
class .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class.
- Copy down .
- Work in pairs .
- Listen .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class.
Write homework .
Preparing date : Thursday , February 22nd 2008
Period 71 :
<b> UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY</b>
Lesson 4 : B- What was wrong with you ? ( B 2, 3 )
I . The aims :
The students continue to review vocabulary about the common illness, they listen
to the tape for specific information . Practice listening and speaking skills .
II. Language content :
- Review vocabulary about the common illness .
- The simple past tense .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>
III.Technique :
Eliciting , Pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Networks
- Demonstrate the group which wins the
game .
2.New activities :
A. Take a survey
- Introduce the aim of the exercise .
- Ask Ss to work in groups of four and ask
them to choose a secretary for their
group.
- Have Ss use the table B2 to take a survey
EX: Were you absent from school last
semester ?
Did you have a cold ?
a stomachache ?
the flu ?
a toothache ?
-Ask the secretaries to give the results of
their groups .
- Combine the result for the whole class .
- Ask Ss to answer the questions :
What was the most common illness?
What was the least common illness?
- Remark .
B. Listen .
- Introduce the aim of the listening to Ss .
- Ask Ss to draw the table in the notebooks
.
- Have Ss predict the days lost through
sickness in class 7A last semester .
- Call on some Ss to give their predictions
- Have Ss listen to the tape and check their
prediction .
- Play the tape again for Ss to complete the
table .
- Greetings .
- Play a game : Networks
2 groups take part in the game .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Work in groups .
- Take a survey .
- Give the results of the
groups .
- Answer the questions .
- Copy the answer in the
notebooks .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Draw the table .
- Predict the days lost
through sickness.
- Give the prediction .
- Listen to the tape and
check the prediction .
- Listen and complete the
table .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>
- Ask Ss to exchange the result with the
partner .
- Call on some Ss to give their answers in
front of the class .
- Play the tape again for Ss to check their
answers .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
+ Cold : 10 + Flu : 43
+ Stomachache : 37 + Headache : 5
+ Toothache : 17
+ Total days lost : 112
3.Consolidation :
- Ask Ss to compare the days lost through
sickness in class 7A with those in their
own class
- Ask some Ss to report in front of the
class .
EX: Last semester in class 7A , cold caused 10
days’ absence but in my class cold caused 7
days’absence …….
- Remark .
4.Homework :
- Write the comparation in the notebooks .
- Do exercise 3 at page 71 in workbook .
- Prepare part 4 .
- Exchange the result with
the partner .
- Give the answer in front of
the class .
- Listen to the tape and
check the answers .
- Copy down .
- Compare the days lost
through sickness in class
7A with the own class .
- Some Ss report in front of
the class .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Friday , February 23rd 2008
Period 72 :
<b> UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY</b>
Lesson 5 : B – What was wrong with you ?( B4 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the symptoms of the
common cold and the cues to prevent it . Practice readind skill.
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Disease - Symptom
- Runny nose - Slight fever
- To cough - To sneeze
- To prevent - To relieve
- Cure => to cure - To disappear
2.Grammar :
The simple present tense
III.Technique :
Explanation , eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>
Textbook , tape , cassette , picture .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Guessing game
- Ask Ss to write a disease which they
caught last time in a paper sheet .
- Have one student go to the board and
others guess .
- Remark , ask Ss some questions about the
disease they caught and lead in the new
lesson .
2.Pre- reading :
- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then
explain some new words to Ss .
+ Disease ( n ) : BÖnh
+ Symptom ( n ) : TriÖu chøng
+ Runny nose ( n ) : Sỉ mịi
+ Slight fever ( n ) : Sèt nhÑ
+ To cough ( v ) : Ho
+ To sneeze ( v ) : Hắt hơi
+ To relieve ( v ) : Lµm gi¶m
+ To prevent ( v ) : Ngăn ngừa
+ To disappear ( v ) : BiÕn mÊt
+ Cure ( n ) = > to cure : Ch÷a trÞ
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Have Ss play a game : rub out and
remember in order to check new words .
- Have Ss work in groups discussing the
questions :
+ Why do people call the cold “ common “?
+ What are the symptoms of the common
cold ?
- Call some Ss from groups to give their
discussion in front of the class .
3.While – reading :
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to
the tape then check their discussion .
- Have Ss read the text in silent .
- Call on some Ss to answer the pre-
questions .
- Have some Ss read the text aloud .
- Correct their pronunciation .
- Have Ss read the text again and find out
the answers for the questions in the book.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and
asnwering the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
- Greetings .
- Play a game : guessing
game .
- All class take part in the
game .
- Listen to the teacher
carefully .
Read new words in chorus and
individually , then guess the
meanings and copy down .
- Play a game .
- Work in groups .
- Give the answers in front
of the class .
- Look at the books and listen to
the tape .
- Read the text in silent .
- Answer the questions .
- Read the text aloud .
- Read the text again and
find out the answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>
the class .
- Correct the mistake and give the correct
answers :
a) Because every year millions of people
catch it .
b) They are : a runny nose , a slight fever ,
coughing and sneezing .
c) No, there is no cure for the common cold .
d) No, these medicines don’t cure a cold ,
but they relieve the symptoms .
e) We can prevent a cold by eating well ,
doing exercise , keeping fit and staying
healthy .
4.Post – reading :
- Ask Ss to write about the common cold .
- Call on some Ss to read their writings in
front of the class .
- Remark .
5.Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Do exercise 4 at page 73 in workbook .
- Prepare unit 12- A1
- Copy down .
- Write about the common
cold .
- Read the writing aloud .
- Write homework.
<b>WEEK 25 </b>
Preparing date : Wednesday , february 28th 2008
Period 73 :
<b> UNIT 12 : LET S EAT!</b>’
Lesson 1 : A – What shall we eat ? ( A1 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the details and practice
food vocabulary .
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Spinach - Durian
- cucumber - Papaya
- Pineapple - Ripe
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>
- The simple present tense .
- The structure : I’d like…….
So do I / I do , too Neither do I / I don’t , either .
III.Technique :
Explanation , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Kim’s game .
( Use the pictures or words written on the
board of : fish , chicken , beef , milk ,
bananas, apples , carrots , oranges )
- Call the students to go to the board and
write again .
- Remark and lead in the new lesson .
2. New activities :
- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ Do you usually go to the market ?
+ Who do you often go to the market with ?
+ What do you often see / buy at the market ?
..
………
- Introduce the situation of the lesson to Ss
and ask Ss to guess what Hoa and her aunt
bought at the market .
- Have Ss look at the pictures and listen to
the tape .
- Ask Ss to look at the book and read after
the tape .
- Explain some new words and structures to
Ss .
+ Spinach ( n ) : Rau chân vịt
+ Cucumber ( n ) : Da chuột
+ Papaya ( n ) : Đu đủ
+ Pineapple ( n ) : Quả dứa
+ Durian ( n ) : Quả sầu riêng
+ Ripe ( adj ) : chín
+ To smell ( v ) : ngöi thÊy / cã mïi
Structures :
+ I like spinach and cucumbers .
So do I / I do , too.
+ I don’t like pork .
Neither do I ./ I don’t , either .
Have Ss play a game : What and where .
- Ask Ss to read the dialogues in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice reading in
front of the class .
- Correct their pronunciation .
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
- Go to the board and
write .
- Answer T’s questions .
- Listen to the teacher and
guess what they bought .
- Look at the pictures and
listen to the tape .
- Read after the tape .
- Listen and write .
Read new words in chorus and
individually , guess meanings and
copy down .
Make sentences as models.
Play a game .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice reading in front
of the class .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>
- Ask Ss to read the dialogues again to find
out the answer in the book .
- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers
1) What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the market ?
2) LN.
3) Does Hoa like pork? How about her aunt ?
4) LN.
5) What meat would they like for dinner ?
6) What are the favorite vegetables of Hoa’s aunt?
7) LN
8) What fruit did they buy ?
9) Why didn’t they buy a papaya ?
10) LN
- Demonstrate the group which wins the
game .
- Ask Ss to write the answer in the notebook
3. Consolidation
- Have Ss talk about the food they like and
dislike .
- Ask Ss to work in group of four making
real conversations about shopping .
- Call on some groups to practice in front of
the class .
- Remark and give marks .
4. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Do exercise 1 at page 74 in workbook .
- Prepare part 2 .
- Read the dialogues again
to find the answer .
- Play a game in 2 groups .
Take the numbers and answer the
questions .
- Clap the hands .
- Write the answers in the
notebook .
- Talk about the food .
- Work in groups making
conversations .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Thursday , March 1st 2008
Period 74 :
<b> UNIT 12 : LET S EAT !</b>’
Lesson 2 : A – What shall we eat ? ( A2 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the structures : I don’t like
..either , I like too / neither do I , So do I to express references . Practice
… ……
speaking skill .
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
Review food vocabulary .
2.Grammar :
3 - I like …..too / So do I .
4 - I don’t like ……either / Neither do I .
III.Technique :
Explanation , pairwork , groupwork ,
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , sub- board , pictures .
V.Procedure :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Networks
- Call on 2 students from 2 groups to go to
the board and write down .
- Remark .
2.Presentation :
- Explain some sentences of Hoa and her
aunt in the dialogues .
- Model sentences :
S1: I don’t like pork .
S2: Neither do I / I don’t either .
S1: I like spinach and cucumbers .
S2: So do I / I do , too.
( So and too are used in the formative sentences .
Neither and either are used in the negative
sentences .)
EX: S1: I am a student .
S2: So am I / I am , too .
S1: I like beef .
S2: I do , too . / So do I .
S1: She isn’t a doctor .
S2: I am not , either . / Neither am I .
S1: I don’t like chicken .
S2: I don’t , either / Neither do I .
( Not either = Neither )
3.Practice :
- Give some pictures or given words to Ss to
practice .
+ Carrots . X
+ Beef V
+ Papaya V
+ Cabbage X
+ Fish X
+ Chicken V
- Have Ss work in pairs using the structures
they have just learnt and given words .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Remark .
- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
- Have Ss practice in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
- Go to the board and
write down .
- Listen to the teacher .
Copy down .
- Practicing using given
words .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the class .
S1: I don’t like carrots .
S2: Neither do I / I don’t , either
S1: I like beef .
S2: So do I / I do , too.
- Write down .
- Practice in pairs ( free )
- Practice in front of the
class .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>
the class .
- Remark .
4.Production :
Have Ss take a survey .
Make example :
S1: I like durians . Do you like them ?
S2: Yes , I like them , too / So do I .
- Call on Ss to give the results .
- Remark .
5. Homework :
- Learn by heart the structures by making 3
sentences with each .
- Do exercise 2,3 at page 74 in workbook .
- Prepare part 3,4 .
- Take a survey .
- Listen .
Practice in groups .
- Give the results .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Friday , March 2nd 2008
Period 75 :
<b> UNIT 12 : LET S EAT !</b>’
Lesson 3: A – What shall we eat ? ( A 3,4 )
I . The aims :
After the lesson , Ss will understand how to make a meal by making some dishes
.
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- To slice - Bowl
- To boil - To heat
- To stir- fry - Soy sauce
- Chopsticks - Spoon
2.Grammar :
The past simple tense
III.Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings . - Greetings .
Name Durian Fish Chicken Cucumbers Peas
Nga
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>
- Ask Ss some questions :
EX: Do you like chicken?
Beef ?
Do you know how to prepare a meal ?
Lead in the new lesson .
2.New activities :
A. Read . then answer the questions .
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer
the question : What is she doing ?
- Call on some Ss to give the answer .
- Introduce the situation and explain some
new words to Ss .
+ To slice ( v ) : Th¸i
+ To boil ( v ) : Luéc
+ To heat ( v ) : ®un nãng
+ To stir – fry ( v ) : Xµo
+ Bowl ( n ) : C¸i b¸t
+ Chopsticks ( n ) : §ịa
+ Soy sauce ( n ) : Xì dầu
+ Spoon ( n ) : Th×a
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Correct their pronunciation .
- Have Ss play a game : Rub out and
remember in order to check new words .
- Have Ss guess the order of the statements :
a) First , she sliced the beef .
b) Then she cooked some rice and boiled some
spinach .
c) Hoa’s aunt cooked dinner .
d) Next, she sliced some green pepers and onions .
e) And then she set the table and the family sat
down to eat .
f) After that she stir- fried the beef and vegetables .
g) Finally , she sliced the cucumbers and made
cucumber salad .
- Ask Ss to work in groups ordering the
sentences .
- Call on some groups to give their prediction
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the
tape then check the order .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answer :
1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. F 6. G 7. E
- Have Ss read the text in silent .
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud .
- Ask Ss to work in groups to write the menu
- Call on some groups to give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answer :
+ Cucumber salad with onions .
- Answer T’s questions .
- Look at the pictures and
answer the question .
- Listen to the teacher .
Read new words in chorus and
individually , guess the
meanings , then copy down .
- Play a game .
- Do exercise .
- Work in groups .
- Give the predictions .
- Listen to the tape and
check the order .
- Read the text in silent .
- Read the text aloud .
- Work in groups .
- Give the answers .
- Write down .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>
+ Boiled spinach
+ Stir- fried beef with green pepers and onions
+ Rice
- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
- Have Ss read the text again then complete
the sentences by adding the missing verbs .
- Have Ss exchange the results with their
partners .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct and give the answer key :
1. Slice 2. slice 3. heat 4. stir- fry
5. add 6. cook 7. add
- Ask Ss to match the completed sentences
with the pictures .
- Have Ss exchange the results with the
partner .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct and ask Ss to write down .
1. C 2. F 3. A 4. D 5. B 6. E 7. G
B. Write . What did you eat and drink yesterday ?
- Ask some Ss the questions : what did you
eat and drink yesterday ?
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and
answering the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
3.Consolidation :
- Have Ss write a short paragraph to tell what
they ate and drank yesterday .
- Call on some Ss to read their writing in
front of the class .
- Remark .
4.Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Lear part remember .
- Do exercise 5 at page 76 in workbook .
- Prepare B1 .
- Read the text again and
complete the sentences .
- Exchange the results
with the partners .
- Give the answers .
- Write down .
- Match the sentences
with the pictures .
- Exchange the result with
the partner .
- Give the answer .
- Write down .
- Asnwer the question .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Write a short paragraph .
- Read the writing in front
of the class .
Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>
<b>WEEK 26 </b>
Preparing date : Wednesday, March 7th 2008
Period 76 :
<b> UNIT 12 : LET S EAT ! </b>’
Lesson 4: B – Our food ( B1 )
I.The aims :
After the lesson , Ss will be able to know why Ba had to go to the doctor’s and
the reason which caused Ba’s stomachache .
II. Language content :
The structures :
- It must be …………..
- It was probably ………
- Make + somebody + Adj/ Do smt .
- Thepast simple tense and present simple tense .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork.
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Guessing game .
( Each student writes a sentence about the
disease they had last time . One student
goes to the board and the rest guess )
- Remark and lead in the new lesson .
2.New activities :
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer
the question :
Where is Ba ?
What is the matter with him ?
- Call on some Ss to give their predictions .
- Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
- All class take part in the
game .
- Look at the picture
carefully .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>
tape and check their prediction.
- Call on some Ss to give the correct
answers .
+ Ba is at the doctor’s .
+ He has an awful stomachache .
- Explain some structures to Ss .
+ It must be something you ate .
+ It was probably the spinach .
+ That dirt can make you sick .
+ These medicine will make you feel better.
- Have Ss make sentences with the
structures .
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Correct their pronunciation .
Comprehension questions :
- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers .
1. What did Ba eat last night ?
2.Who washed the spinach ?
3.LN
4.Why did Ba go to the doctor?
5.Did his parents eat spinach ?
6.LN
7.What made him sick ?
8.What did the doctor give him ?
-Remark and state the group which wins the
game .
Now complete the story .
- Ask Ss to complete the story based on
the dialogue above .
- Have Ss exchange the result with the
partner .
- Call on some Ss to give the result in front
of the class .
- Correct and give answer key :
Ba went to the doctor because he was sick . The
doctor asked Ba some questions . Ba said he had
some spinach last night . The doctor said he must
wash the spinach more carefully/well. Vegetables
can be dirty . The dirt can make people sick .
She / the doctor gave Ba some medicine to make
him feel better .
- Call on some Ss to read the story in front
of the class .
3.Consolidation :
- Repeat the content of the lesson and the
structures .
4.Homework :
- Learn by heart the structures by making
to the tape .
- Give the answers .
- Listen to the teacher and
copy down .
- Make sentences using the
structures .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice reading the
dialogue in front of the
class .
- Play a game
2 groups take part in the game .
- Clap hands .
- Complete the story .
- Exchange the result with
the partner .
- Give the result .
- Copy down .
- Read the story aloud .
- Listen carefully .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>
3 sentences with each .
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 76,77 in
workbook .
- Prepare part B2.
Write homework .
Preparing date : Thursday , March 8th 2008
Period 77:
<b> UNIT 12 : LET S EAT ! </b>’
Lesson 5 : B – Our food ( B2, )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a balanced diet . They
will know what they should do to have a healthy lifestyle.
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Balanced diet - Energy
- To affect - Body- building food
- Moderate - Dairy product
- Amount - Cereals
- Lifestyle - Plenty of
2.Grammar :
III.Technique :
Explanation , using pictures or real objects , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
T’sActivities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ What do you usually have for breakfast /
lunch / dinner ?
+ What is your favorite food ?
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2. New activities :
- Introduce the situation : “ Food plays an
important part in our life . It gives us the
main energy for body development . thus ,
a balanced diet is especially important . In
our today’s lesson , we will learn about the
definition of a balanced diet and useful
guidelines about food”
- Explain some new words and phrases to Ss.
+ Balanced diet ( n ) : Chế độ ăn hợp lí
+ To affect ( v ) : ¶nh hëng
+ Moderate ( adj ) => Moderation ( n )
+ Amount ( n ) : Sè lỵng
+ Energy ( n ) : Năng lợng
+ Body- building food ( n ) : Thức ăn giúp
phát triển c¬ thĨ.
- Greetings .
- Answer T’s questions .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Listen and write .
Read new words in chorus and
individually , guess meanings ,
then copy down .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>
+ Dairy product ( n ) : Thực phẩm bơ sữa
+ Cereals ( n ) : Ngò cèc
+ Lifestyle ( n ) : Lèi sèng
+ Fatty food ( n ) : Thức ăn giàu chÊt bÐo
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually.
- Have Ss play a game : Rub out and
remember .
- Ask Ss to do an exercise : T or F prediction
What does a balanced diet mean?
1) Eat a lot of meat .
2) Eat a little fruit and vegetables .
3) Eat a moderate amount of sugar .
4) Eat a little fatty food .
5) Eat plenty of food you like .
- Have Ss discuss in groups .
- Call on Ss to give their discussion .
- Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the
tape and check their prediction .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct the mistake and give the correct
answer :
1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F
- Have Ss read the passage in silent .
- Call on 3 or 4 students to read the passage
aloud .
- Ask Ss to read the passage again and find
out the answers for the questions .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class .
- Correct and give the answer key :
a) Sugar adds taste to food and it gives you energy .
b) A balanced diet is not enough all people need
exercise to keep a healthy life .
c) Ss’ Answers .
3. Consolidation :
- Ask Ss to do an exercise : Matching
- Ask Ss match and talk about a balanced diet .
- Make example :
- Play a game .
- Do exercise .
- Work in groups .
- Give their prediction.
- Look at the book , listen
to the tape and check the
prediction .
- Give the answers .
- Read in silent .
- Some Ss read the
passage aloud .
- Read the passage again
to find out the answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and
answering in front of the
class .
- Write the answers in the
notebooks .
- Do exercise .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>
<b>Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 </b>
To have a balanced diet we should eat a lot of
fruit ...
- Have Ss work in groups .
- Call on some gr oups to give their dicussion
in front of the class .
- Remark .
4. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Write a menu for yourself and your family .
- Prepare part 4 .
- Listen .
- Work in groups .
- Give the discussion in front of
the class .
Write homework .
Preparing date : Friday , March 9th 2008
Period 78 :
<b> UNIT 12 : LET S EAT !</b>’
Lesson 6 : B- Our food ( B4 )
I . The aims :
The students will listen to a text for details and further practice in food
vocabulary . They continue to practice listening skill .
II . Language content :
- Review the food vocabulary .
- The past simple tense
III.Technique :
Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board .
- Have 6 students from 2 groups take part in
- Greetings .
- Play a game : Slap the
board .
2 groups take part in the game .
Should Meat
A little Fruit
Too much Coffee
Deep- fried food
Shouldn’t Vegetables
Plenty of Eggs
Moderate Body-building food
Energy Amount Affect
Dairy
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>
the game .
- Remark and state the group which wins the
game .
2. Pre – listening :
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the
names of the things in the pictures.
- Call on 3 or 4 students to give their answers
- Correct the mistake and give the correct
answers .
a. Rice b. Noodles c. Fish d. Vegetables
e. Fruit f. Beef g. Juice h. Water
- Introduce the aim of the listening , then ask
Ss to predict what Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa
had for their lunch .
- Have Ss work in groups .
- Call on some groups to give their prediction
3. While – listening :
- Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the
tape , then check their prediction .
- Play the tape for Ss ( two times )
- Ask Ss to exchange the result with the
partner .
- Play the tape again for Ss to check .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct and give the answer key :
Lan : f, b, d ,g Nga : a, d ,g
Ba : c, a , e , h Hoa : b , e , g .
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and write
what Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for
lunch .
- Call on some Ss to read their writing aloud
- Remark .
4.Post – listening :
- Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers
1) What did Lan have for lunch ?
2) LN .
3) Did Ba have some fruit ?
4) Who had vegetables ?
5) LN
6) Who drank juice ?
7) What did Ba drink ?
8) Did Hoa have fish ?
- Remark .
5. Homework :
- Write a paragraph about Lan , Ba , Nga and
Hoa had for lunch .
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 77,78 in
workbook .
- Prepare language focus 4 .
Clap the hands
- Look at the pictures and
call the names of the
things .
- Listen to the teacher
- Work in groups .
- Give the prediction .
- Look at the book and
listen to the tape .
- Exchange the result with
the partner .
- Listen to the tape again
and check the result .
- Write down .
- Write what Lan , Ba Nga
and Hoa had for lunch .
- Read the writings aloud
- Play a game in 2
groups .
- Answer the questions
using the information in
the listening .
- Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>
<b>WEEK 27 </b>
Preparing date : Wednesday , March 14th 2008
Period 79 :
<b> LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 </b>
I.The aims :
The students do exercises in order to practice the structures which have been
learnt , they will use them and apply to do exercises well .
II. Language content :
- The simple past tense .
- Indefinite quantifiers : A little / a lot of / lots of / too much .
- Too / either / neither / so .
- Imperatives .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , sub- board , pictures .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ What did you do yesterday ?
+ Did you watch TV last night ?
+ What did you do during last summer
vacation ?
..
………
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2.Consolidation and practice :
1) Past simple tense :
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book
and answer what they are doing .
- Call on some Ss to answer the questions
in front of the class .
a) Watch TV .
b) Eat at a restaurant .
c) Go to the movie theatre .
d) Read books .
e) Play soccer .
- Have Ss answer the questions , using the
pictures .
- Make example :
S1: Did you do your homework last night ?
S2: No, I didn’t . I watched TV .
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and
answering the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
- Greetings .
- Answer T’s questions .
- Look at the pictures and answer
what they are doing .
- Answer the questions .
-
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>
the class .
- Correct and give the correct answers .
f) Did you eat dinner at home on
Wednesday ?
No, I didn’t . I ate dinner at a restaurant .
g) Did you go to school yesterday ?
No, I didn’t . I went to the movie theatre .
h) Did you watch a video on the weekend ?
No, I didn’t . I read books .
i) Did you play basketball yesterday ?
No, I didn’t . I played soccer .
- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
2)Indefinite quantifiers :
- Have Ss repeat the indefinite quantifiers
and the use .
- Ask them to do exercise 2 .
Write the correct expression .
- Ask Ss to write the correct expression ,
using the pictures .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers in
front of the class .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
+ A little coffee . + A lot of salt .
+ A lot of tea . + Too much water .
+ A little sugar
- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
Complete the dialogues :
- Have Ss look at the pictures and then
complete the dialogues .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Remark .
3+ 4) Too and either / So and neither .
- Ask Ss to repeat the use of too/ so / either
and neither .
- Have Ss practice the dialogues in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front the
class .
- Have Ss play a game : Noughts and
Crosses .
- Write down .
- Repeat the indefinite
quantifiers and the use .
- Do exercise .
- Write the correct
expression .
- Give the answer .
- Write down in the
notebooks .
- Look at the pictures and
complete the dialogues .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class.
- Repeat the use of too,
either , so and neither .
- Practice the dialogues in
pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class
- Play a game .
2 groups take part in the game .
Make sentences with the words ,
using too, so , either and neither .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>
- Remark and ask Ss to write sentences in the
notebooks.
EX: S1: I like mangoes .
S2: So do I / I do , too .
S1: I don’t like bananas .
S2 : I don’t , either / Neither do I .
5) Imperatives :
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and complete the
instructions .
- explain some new words :
+ To Peel ( v )
+ To mix ( v )
+ Vinegar ( n )
- Call on some Ss to give their result in
front of the class .
- Correct and give the answer key :
a) peel e) Add
b) Wash f) Stir
c) Slice g) Wait
d) Mix
3.Consolidation :
- Repeat the structures which the students
have learnt .
4. Homework :
- Do test yourself 4 in workbook
- Review for doing a written test .
- Write down .
- Look at the pictures and
complete the instructions .
- Listen and write down .
- Give the answer .
- Write down in the
notebooks .
- Listen carefully .
Write homework .
Preparing date : Thursday , March 15th 2008
Period 80 :
<b> WRITTEN TEST </b>
I.The aims :
The students will apply their knowledge to do the test well . Through the test , the
teacher will be able to know about Ss’ knowledge .
II. Test :
<b> Written Test ( Af U12 ) No1 </b>
Time : 45 minutes
I.Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets .
1. Yesterday , Hoa and her aunt ( go ) ………to the market .
2. I would like ( tell ) ………you about my family .
3. Why ( be ) …………you absent from school yesterday ?
4. I ( be ) ……….fourteen years old next week .
5. My father ( not watch ) ……….TV last night . He ( read )
newspapers and magazines .
………
6. When you ( buy ) ……….this dress ? - 2 days ago .
7. Be careful! the children ( cross ) ……….the street .
II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>
1. She ……….her teeth twice a day .( Brushed / to brush / brushes )
2. How ……..is your brother ? - He’s one meter seventy centimeters .( high/ tall /
heavy )
3. You mustn’t …………up late .( stay / to stay / staying )
4. He can speak English well and …………can his sister ( Too/ So / Neither )
5. Stop please . That is too …………..coffee .( lots of / much / little )
6. We won’t attend the meeting tomorrow and ………will he .( So / either / Neither )
7. A balanced diet is good ……….your health .( to / with / for )
8. I am glad ………….you’re feeling better .( hear / to hear / heard )
III.Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given .
1. Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because of her sickness .
=> Because Lan ………
2. What is your daughter’s age , Mrs Mai ?
=> How ……….
3. It took Mr. Hoang an hour to walk to work yesterday .
=> Mr. Hoang spent ………
4. How heavy is the chicken ?
=> What ………
IV.Fill in the blank with the appropriate preposition
1. Trang received a letter ………her aunt last week .
2. You should take care ……….yourself .
3. Eating too much candy is bad ……….you .
4. The dentist looked ……….my teeth and he told me ……….my broken
tooth
5. What’s wrong ………..your daughter , Mrs. Mai ?
6. We are working hard ………… the farm and your uncle often works
.us .
…………
V.Read the passage then answer the questions .
My name is John , and this is my story . Last year just before Christ mas my family
and our uncle and aunt decided to go to Perth for holiday . We went in two cars but
we were about halfway there my uncle wanted to turn round and come back . He said
it was too far , and it was terribly hot, too. Even at night it was really hot . Anyway ,
what we decided to do was to drive back about 160 km to a place where the train went
through . Then we put both cars on the train and we all went to Perth by train . That
was fun . It was a good train .
We had a good time in Perth but we had to cut our holiday short . You see , while we
were there my grandmother ( mother’s mother) in Melourne died . Most of us flew
back but my dad and my uncle came on the train with the two cars and then had to
drive back to Melbourne from Port Pirie .
1. Why did John’s uncle want to come back ?
A. Because it was too hot B. Because it was too far
C. Because he was too tired D. Both A and B
2. In the end John’s family went to Perth ……….
A. By train B. By coach C. By car D. By plane
3. Who died when John’s family were on holiday ?
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>
A. His mother’s father B. His mother’s mother
C. His father’s mother D. His father’s father
4. Most of John family came back ………
A. By train B. By ship C. By plane D. By car
<b> Written Test ( Af U12 ) No2</b>
Time : 45 minutes
I.Choose the correct answers to complete the sentences .
1. She doesn’t like pork , and ……..does her uncle .( Either / So / Neither )
2. I would like ……….some fruit .( Buying / To buy / Buy )
3. You must drink …….water everyday . ( Much / Many / A little )
4. He was busy yesterday and ……….were his brothers ( So / Neither / Too)
5. My mother didn’t wash it but I ………( didn’t / did / do )
6. Vegetables are good ……..your health ( To / with / for )
7. How ……is Nga ? She is 36 kilos . ( high / weight / heavy )
8. You should ……….your hands before meals .( to wash / wash / washing )
II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs .
1. Lan ( be ) …………very tired when she ( catch ) ………a cold two days ago
2. He ( not come ) ………to the meeting last week .
3. I ( brush ) ……….my teeth everynight , but last night I ( forget )
to brush them .
………
4. Where is your mother ? She ( Plant ) ……….flowers in the garden .
5. Nga is now in her room. She ( iron ) ………her clothes .
She always ( do ) ………it herself .
III.Fill in the blanks with the suitable prepositions .
1. There is a good selection …………fruit ………….display .
2. My aunt sliced the beef ………thin strips .
3. Linh set the table ………plates , bowls , chopsticks and spoons .
4. Salads are good …………your health , but we must wash them well ……..water
.
5. We must clean hands ………having a meal .
6. Hoa made cucumber salad ………..some onions .
IV.Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given .
1. She has over 100 stamps in her collection .
=> There ……….
2. What is the price of this cap ?
=> How much………..
3. How long is this river ?
=> What ……….
4. I do my homework in an hour .
=> It takes ………
V.Read the passage then answer the questions .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>
My name is John , and this is my story . Last year just before Christ mas my family
and our uncle and aunt decided to go to Perth for holiday . We went in two cars but
we were about halfway there my uncle wanted to turn round and come back . He said
it was too far , and it was terribly hot, too. Even at night it was really hot . Anyway ,
what we decided to do was to drive back about 160 km to a place where the train went
through . Then we put both cars on the train and we all went to Perth by train . That
was fun . It was a good train .
We had a good time in Perth but we had to cut our holiday short . You see , while we
were there my grandmother ( mother’s mother ) in Melourne died . Most of us flew
back but my dad and my uncle came on the train with the two cars and then had to
drive back to Melbourne from Port Pirie .
1. When did John’s family go to Perth ?
..
………
2. Why did John’s uncle want to come back ?
.
………
3. How did John’s family go to Perth in the end ?
………
4. Who in John’s family had to go by train and car to Melbourne ?
.
………
III.Remark
IV.Homework :
- Prepare Unit 13 – A1 .
Preparing date : Friday , March 16th 2008
Period 81 :
<b> UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES </b>
Lesson 1 : A – Sports ( A1,4 )
I.The aims :
By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about the ten most popular
sports which teenagers in the USA like best and know the names of some sports .
They will know how to change from adjectives to adverbs.
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Skate boarding - Roller- skating
- Roller – blading - Baseball
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>
2.Grammar :
Review the simple past tense and simple present tense .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask Ss some questions such as :
+ Do you like playing sports ?
+ What sport do you play ?
+ When do you play …….?
+ Who do you often play with ?
+ What do you think about ………?
.
………
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2.New activities :
A) Listen and read . Then answer the questions .
- Introduce the situation of the lesson and
ask Ss to look at the pictures then answer
the questions :
What are they doing ?
- Explain some new words :
+ Skate boarding ( n ) :
+ Roller- skating ( n ) :
+ Roller- blading ( n ) :
+ Baseball ( n ) :
+ Surprising result ( n ) :
+ Surprisingly ( adv ) :
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board .
- Have Ss discuss in groups about the
question : What sports do you think are
the most popular in the USA ?
- Call on some groups to give their
prediction .
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to
the tape then check their prediction .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Ask Ss to read the text in silent .
- call on some Ss to read the text aloud .
- Have Ss answer the question :
What is the most popular sport in the USA ?
Which sport is at 11th position ?
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and
answering the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
- Greetings .
- Answer T’s questions .
- Listen to the teacher ,
look at the pictures and
answer the question .
- Listen and write down .
- Read new words in
chorus and individually ,
guess meaning then copy
down .
- Play a game
- Work in groups .
- Give the prediction .
- Look at the books , listen
to the tape and check the
prediction .
- Give the answers .
- Read the text in silent .
- Read the text aloud .
- Answer the questions .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>
the class .
B) Read . Then answer the questions .
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer
the question: what kind of sports in the
picture ?
What is WFF? WTS?
- Call on some Ss to answer .
- Ask Ss to read the text and check the
answer.
- Explain some new words to Ss.
+ To win ( v ) => won
+ Prize ( n ) :
+ Participant ( n ) : A person who take part in
the game .
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Ask Ss to read the text in silent .
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.
- Correct the pronunciation .
- Have Ss work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Correct the mistakes and give the correct
answers .
a) He takes part in WFF.
b) His school team won the first prize , they were
so happy and wanted to keep this activity .
c) One activity is a 5 walk to the beach on Sunday
morning , and the other is walk- to – school
day
d) It’s 5 km from school to the beach .
e) Wednesday is the WTS day .
f) Members living near school often take part in
the WTS day .
- Ask Ss to copy down .
3. Consolidation:
Take a class survey :
- Have Ss work in groups asking their
classmates what sport they like most .
- Call on some groups to practice in front of
the class .
- Ask Ss to write the number of students
who like each sport best , then complete
the table in the notebooks .
- Ask Ss to answer the question : What
sport is the most popular in the class ?
4.Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Look at the picture and
answer the question .
- Answer the question.
- Read the text .
- Listen and write down .
- Read new words in
chorus and individually .
- Read the text in silent .
- Read the text aloud .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Copy down.
- Work in groups .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Write the number of the
students who like each
sport best .
- Answer the question .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>
- Write what sports you like best .
- Do exercise 1,2 in workbook .
- Prepare part A3,5
<b>WEEK 28 </b>
Preparing date : Wednesday , March 21st 2008
Period 82 :
<b> UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES </b>
Lesson 2 : A – Sports ( 3,5 )
I.The aims :
After the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to change from adjectives into
adverbs .They will continue to talk about sports .
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Skillful => Skillfully - Safe => safely
- Cyclist - To cycle
- To be aware of - Lifeguard
- Strict - To obey
2.Grammar :
Structure : Adjectivie + ly => adverb
III.Technique :
Explanation , eliciting , pairwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Networks
- Have Ss work in groups .
- Call on Ss from 2 groups to go to the
board and write .
- Remark and state the group which wins
the game .
- Greetings .
- Play a game : Networks
Discuss in groups .
- Go to the board and write
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>
2.New activities :
A) Listen . Then practice with a partner .
- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then
ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the
names of the pictures .
- Explain some new words to Ss .
+ Good ( adj ) => well ( adv )
+ Skillful ( adj ) => Skillfully ( adv )
+ Safe ( adj ) => Safely ( adv )
+ Cyclist ( n ) :
+ To cycle ( v ) = To ride a bike
- Introduce how to change adjectives into
adverbs and the use of Adj and Adv :
Adjective + ly => adverb
EX : Slow => Slowly
Bad => badly
Quick => quickly
+ He’s a good soccer player
He plays soccer well
+ She’s a quick runner
She runs quickly .
Adjectives often go with To Be
Adverbs often go with ordinary verbs .
- Ask Ss to make sentences using adjectives
and adverbs .
- Have Ss look at the books and listen to the
tape .
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the text .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
B) Write . Change the adjectives in brackets to
adverbs .
- Ask Ss to complete the passage with the
correct adverbs in brackets .
- Explain some new words to Ss .
+ To be aware of :
+ Lifeguard ( n )
+ Strict ( adj ) => Strictly
+ To obey ( v )
- Have Ss exchange the result with the
partner
- Call on 2=> 3 Ss to give the results in
front of the class .
- Correct and give the correct answers
- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
3.Consolidation:
- Repeat the way to change adjective to
adverb .
- Give some cues and ask Ss to make
sentences .
+ Slow / slowly / swimmer
- Listen to the teacher .
- Listen and write down .
Read new words in chorus and
individually , then copy down .
- Listen to the teacher
carefully .
- Make sentences with the
adjectives and adverbs .
- Look at the books and
listen to the tape .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice reading in front
of the class .
- Complete the passage
with the correct adverbs .
- Listen and write down .
- Exchange the result with
the partner .
- Give the results in front
of the class .
- Write down .
- Listen .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>
+ Quick / quickly / runner
+ Bad / badly / volleyball
Make example :
+ She’s a slow runner
She runs slowly .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Correct the mistakes .
4.Homework :
- Learn by heart new words and structures
by making sentences with them .
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 83 in workbook .
- Prepare part B1 .
cues .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Write homework.
Preparing date : Thursday , March 22nd 2008
Period 83 :
<b> UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES </b>
Lesson 3 : B – Come and play ( B1 )
I.The aims :
The students will cotinue to practice about the topic of sports and in modal verbs .
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Ought to - Paddles
2.Grammar :
Making an invitation :
Would you like to …………?
=> Yes , let’s / I’d like to / That’s a good idea .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork ,
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Find someone
Who .
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
Find someone who………… Name
Can play soccer well.
Can run quickly .
Can play volleyball skillfully .
Can’t swim quickly .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2.New activities :
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer
the question : What are they doing ?
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to
the tape .
- Explain some new words to Ss .
+ Ought to ( modal verb ) = must
+ Paddle ( n ) :
+ The structure : making invitation :
Would you like to play table tennis?
I’d like to .
Would you like to + V ?
EX : Would you like to come to my house ?
have lunch with me ?
He ought to do his homework before playing
table tennis .
She ought to help her mother .
- Have Ss make sentences with the
structures .
- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find
the answers for the questions .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs : one asks and
one answers.
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class .
- Correct the mistakes and give the correct
answers :
a) He must finish his homework before he plays
table tennis .
b) Nam will be ready in a few minutes .
c) Ba will finish a question for math .
d) Ba has 2 paddles .
- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
3.Consolidation :
- Give some cues and ask Ss to practice :
+ Nam / before / soccer / do homework .
+ Lan / when / swimming / swim with adult.
+ We / after meals / brush teeth .
- Make example :
S1: What should Nam do before he plays
soccer ?
S2: He must do his homework .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Look at the picture and
answer the question .
- Look at the book and listen
to the tape .
- Listen and write down .
- Make sentences with the
structures .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice reading in front of
the class .
- Read the dialogue again to
find the answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Write in the notebook .
- Practice with the cues .
- Listen .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Remark
4.Homework :
- Make 3 examples with each structure .
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 83,84 in
workbook.
- Prepare part B2 .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class:
S1: What should Lan do when she
goes swimming ?
S2: She must swim with an adult .
S1: What should we do after
meals?
S2: We should brush our teeth .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Friday , March 23rd 2008
Period 84 :
<b> UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES </b>
Lesson 4 : B – Come and play ( B2 )
I.The aims :
The students will continue to practice in making , accepting and refusing an
invitation , using modal verbs .
II. Language content :
Review the structure :
Would you like to + V ………….?
I’d love to . / That’s a good idea .
Sorry / That’s too bad .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , using pictures .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures , sub- board .
V.Procedure :
<b> T s Activities </b>’ Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss practice using modal verbs : one
student gives the situation , one gives the
advice .
- EX: S1: I’m very cold .
S2: You should stay inside , you
shouldn’t go out .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2.Presentation :
- Introduce the situation of the lesson .
- Greetings .
- Practice in pairs .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to
the tape .
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the
dialogue .
- Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Correct the pronunciation.
3.Practice :
- Ask Ss to make similar dialogues using
the cues given in the box replacing the
underlined words .
Make example :
S1: Come and play volleyball.
S2: I’m sorry . I don’t think I can .
S1: That’s too bad . Why not ?
S2: Well, I should visit my grandmother .
S1: Can you play on the weekend ?
S2: Yes, I can .
S1: All right . See you on Saturday afternoon .
S2: Ok. Bye .
S1: Bye .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Correct the mistakes if necessary .
4.Production :
- Ask Ss to make their own dialogues ,
using the 3 pictures in the bottom .
- Give some cues ;
S1: Come and play ……….
S2: I’m sorry , ………..
S1: Why not?
S2: I must ………
S1: Can you …………..?
S2: Yes, …………..
S1: ……….
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to make dialogue in
front of the class .
- Correct the mistake .
5. Homework :
- Write 3 dialogues in the workbook .
- Do exercise 3,4 in workbook .
- Prepare part B3,4 .
to the tape .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class.
- Make similar dialogues ,
using given words .
- Listen .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Make 3 dialogues , using
the pictures at the bottom .
- Using some cues .
- Work in pairs .
- Some pairs practice in front
of the class .
- Write homework.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>
<b>WEEK 29</b>
Preparing date : Wednesday , March 28th 2008
Period 85:
<b> UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES </b>
Lesson 5 : B- Come and play ( B3, 4)
I.The aims :
After the lesson , Ss will know about a new sport and they continue to practice
with modal verbs .
Practice reading skill.
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Surface - Scuba diving
- Underwater - To invent => invention
- Pearl diver - Vessel
- To explore - Special breathing equipment
- Human - Opportunity
2.Grammar :
Review the modal verbs .
III.Technique :
Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , pictures , sub- board
V.Procedure
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Networks
- Have Ss work in groups .
- Call 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board
and write .
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2. Presentation :
- Introduce the situation of the lesson and
ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer
the question : what are the pictures
about ?
- Explain some new words to Ss .
+ Surface ( n )
+ Underwater ( n )
+ Pearl diver ( n ) = the person who dives
underwater and finds the pearls .
+ To invent ( v => invention ( n )
+ Special breathing equipment ( n )
+ Scuba- diving ( n )
+ Vessel ( n ) = ship
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
- Work in groups .
- Go to the board and write
- Listen to the teacher and
look at the pictures , then
answer the question .
- Listen and write .
Read new words in chorus and
individually , guess the
meanings , then copy down .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>
+ To explore ( v )
+ Human ( n ) = people
+ Opportunity ( n ) = chance
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Correct the pronunciation .
Have Ss do exercise : True or False prediction
( Questions in B3 at page 137 )
- Have Ss work in groups .
- Call on some groups to give their
predictions .
3. While – reading :
- Have Ss read the passage and check their
predictions.
- Call on some Ss to give the answers and
ask them to correct the false sentences .
Reading comprehension : Lucky numbers .
1) How long could a pearl diver stay underwater?
2) Now, How long can a diver stay underwater?
3) LN
4) When did Jacques Couteau die?
5) When did he invent the deep sea diving vessel ?
6) LN
7) What could he study ?
8) How can we explore the oceans now ?
- Have Ss work in groups .
- Ask Ss to complete the passage with the
modal verbs in the box .
- Have Ss exchange the results with the
partners .
- Call on some Ss to give the answer in
front of the class .
- Correct the mistakes .
4. Post – reading :
- Have Ss talk about inventions .
- Give some cues :
Inventions :
+ Special breathing equipment .
Explore the oceans .
Learn about the sea
EX: Before special breathing equipment we
couldn’t explore the oceans , we couldn’t learn
about the sea ……..
+ Electricity :
Read all nights
- Do exercise .
- Work in groups .
- Give the predictions .
- Read the passage and
check the prediction .
- Give the answers , then
correct the false sentences
a) F. Most of the world’s surface
is water .
b) T
c) T
d) F. Jacques Couteau invented a
deep- sea diving vessel .
e) T
Play a game in groups .
- Complete the passage .
- Exchange the results with
the partners .
- Give the answers .
- Talk about the
inventions .
- Work in groups .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>
Watch TV
Use computers
Listen to music
Before electricity , we couldn’t ……..
+ The motorbikes :
Travel far .
Get home quickly .
Visit places
Before motorbike, we couldn’t ………
- Have Ss work in groups .
- Call on some groups to give the results in
front of the class .
- Remark .
5. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Do exercise 5 at page 86 in workbook .
- Prepare unit 14 – A1
- Give the results in front
of the class .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Thursday , March 29th 2008
Period 86 :
<b> UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN</b>
Lesson 1 : A – Time for TV ( A1 )
I.The aims :
After the lesson , Ss will learn about a new topic , The activities in freetime such
as watching TV , playing chess….. and know specific information about Lan and Hoa
.
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Series - Adventure
- Cricket - To sound
- to prefer - To guess
2.Grammar :
Review the invitation and accepting or refusing .
Would you like to ………….
=> I’d love to / I’m sorry , I can’t ……
III.Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using picture .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , picture .
V.Procedure
T’s Activities <b> Ss Activities</b>’
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Chatting with Ss about their freetime by
some questions :
- Greetings .
- Answer the questions .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>
What do you usually do in your freetime ?
Do you like watching TV?
Do you like watching news in English?
What programs on TV do you like
watching?
What is your favorite program?
How much time do you spend watching TV
a day ?
.
………
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2. Presentation :
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and introduce :
This is the picture of Hoa’s family . Look at
it and guess what they do in their freetime ?
do they watch TV?
- Introduce the situation : Watching TV is
one of the most popular activities in
freetime . We are going to listen to a
dialogue between Lan and Hoa . What do
Lan’s / Hoa’s family do in their freetime ?
- Explain some new words to Ss .
+ Series ( n ) :
+ Adventure ( n )
+ Cricket ( n )
+ To prefer ( v ) = to like ……better …
+ To sound ( v )
+ To guess ( v ) = to predict
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Have them play a game : what and where .
- Ask Ss to guess what Lan and Hoa usually
do in the evening .
- Call on some Ss to give their predictions .
3. Practice :
- Ask Ss to look at the books , listen to the
tape and check their predictions .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue
- Call on 3 or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in
front of the class .
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again then
choose the best answers .
- Have Ss exchange the results with the
partners .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct and give the key :
a) Lan invites Hoa to eat dinner with her family .
- Look at the picture and
listen .
- Listen to the teacher .
- Listen and write down .
Read new words in chorus and
individually , guess the
meanings , then copy down .
- Play a game .
- Guess what Lan and
Hoa do in the evening .
- Give the predictions .
- Look at the books , listen to the
tape and check the predictions.
- Give the answer :
Hoa usually talks about her day,
then she reads and sometimes
she plays chess .
Lan usually watches TV.
- Work in pairs reading
the dialogue .
- Practice reading in front
of the class .
- Do exercise .
- Exchange the results
with the partners .
- Give the answers .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>
b) Lan wants Hoa to watch TV before dinner .
c) Hoa’s family doesn’t have a TV because her
aunt and uncle don’t like watching TV.
d) Hoa likes spending time with her aunt and uncle
at night .
e) Lan’s family always watches TV in the evening
- Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .
4. Production :
- Have Ss work in pairs asking and
answering about themselves .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Remark .
5.Homework .
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3
lines for each .
- Do exercise 1 at page 87 in workbook .
- Prepare part A2 .
- Write down.
- Work in pairs .
- Some pairs practice in
front of the class .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Friday , March 30th 2008
Period 87 :
<b> UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN </b>
Lesson 2 : A – Time for TV ( A2 )
I.The aims :
The students practice the dialogue in order to review the structure “ Would you
like to ………?” question and answer to talk about their favorite TV program .
Practice speaking skill.
II. Language content :
1.Vocabulary :
- Detective movie - Pop concert
- Classical concert - Cowboy movie
- Drama - Advertisement
2.Grammar :
Review : would you like to + V ?
III.Technique :
Eliciting , using picture , pairwork , groupwork .
IV.Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .
V.Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’Activities
1.Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Slap the board .
- Teacher reads in Vietnamese , Ss slap in
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
Each group has 3 students to take
part in the game.
Adventure Concer
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>
English.
- State the group which wins the game .
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2.Presentation :
- Introduce the situation of the lesson .
- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to
the tape .
- Explain some new words :
+ Cowboy movie ( n )
+ Detective movie ( n )
+ Pop concert ( n )
+ Classical concert ( n )
+ Drama ( n )
+ Advertisement ( n )
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Correct their pronunciation .
- Have Ss work in pairs reading the
dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Correct the pronunciation .
- Explain the model sentences :
What would you like to watch / see?
I’d like to watch / see a cowboy movie .
3.Practice :
- Ask Ss to look at the advertisements ,
make up similar dialogues .
- Have Ss work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class .
- Correct the mistakes if necessary .
4.Further practice :
- Give a mapped dialogue :
Hoa ……….Lan
Would ……theater? ….good . What would
you ………..?
.easy life .
… ……
youth theater . Ok …….Tuesday night?
Sorry ….E club .
How….Thursday? Ok .
Fine, let’s ………
Clap the hands .
- Listen .
- Look at the books and
listen to the tape .
- Listen and write down .
Read new words in chorus and
individually , guess the meanings ,
then copy down .
- Work in pairs reading the
dialogue .
- Practice reading in front of
the class .
- Listen carefully .
- Look at the advertisements
and make up similar
dialogues .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class.
S1: Would you like to go to the
concert this week ?
S2: That sounds good . What would
you like to see?
S1: There is a classical concert on
at Hanoi opera House.
S2: Ok. Can you make it on
Tuesday night ?
S1: Sorry , I have to go to E club .
S2: ………
- Look at the mapped dialogue .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>
- Have Ss work in pairs using mapped
dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to role play in front of
the class .
- Correct the mistake.
5. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words .
- Make a dialogue in the notebook .
- Prepare part A3 .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the
class .
- Write homework .
<b>WEEK 30</b>
Preparing date: Wednesday , April 4th 2008
Period 88:
<b> UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN </b>
Lesson 3 : A – Time for TV ( A3 ,4 )
I. The aims :
After the lesson , students will be able to understand about TV in Viet Nam thirty
years ago and today .
Practice reading skill .
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Owner - To change
- To gather - Might
2. Grammar :
Review the simple present tense and past simple tense .
III. Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures .
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , pictures , sub- board .
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Hangman
3 words : Watch – television – living room
- Have Ss guess the words .
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2. New activities :
A. Read : TV in Viet Nam
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and say about them .
- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain
some new words to Ss .
+ Owner ( n ) : the person who has TV .
+ To gather ( v ) :
+ To change ( v ) :
+ Might ( modal verb ) :
- Have Ss read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Correct their pronunciation .
- Have Ss play a game : what and where .
- Ask Ss to do an exercise : True or False prediction.
1) Thirty years ago in Viet Nam , a lot of people
had TV sets .
2) These TV owners were very popular .
3) The neighbors gathered to watch color programs
in the evening .
4) Now , they don’t spend much time together .
5) A few people have TV sets today .
- Have Ss do exercise in groups .
- Call on some groups to give their predictions .
- Ask the rest groups to exchange the results .
- Have Ss look at the book , listen to the tape and
check their predictions .
- Call on some Ss to give the answers .
- Correct and give the answer key :
1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5 . F
- Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud .
- Give some answers and ask students to find out
the questions .
1) No, very few people .
2) The black and white programs .
3) They might sleep a little .
4) No, noone .
5) In their own living room .
- Have students work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of
the class .
- Correct the mistakes and ask students to write
down .
* Now complete the summary :
- Ask students to read the passage again then find
the words to complete the summary .
- Have students exchange the results with the
partners .
- Call on some students to give the answers in front
of the class .
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
All class take part in the game .
- Look at the pictures and say
about them .
- Listen and write .
- Read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Play a game .
- Work in groups .
- Give the predictions .
- Exchange the result.
- Give the answers .
- Some students read the passage
aloud .
- Read the passage again and
find the questions for the
answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and answering
in front of the class .
- Read the passage again and
complete the summary .
- Exchange the result with the
partner .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>
- Correct the mistakes and give the answer key :
1. people 2. not 3. TV 4. popular
5. evening 6. gather 7. they 8. today
9. have 10. life 11. know
- Call on some students to read the summary aloud .
B. Play with words .
- Ask students to look at the picture and answer the
question : what is she doing ?
- Play the tape for students .
- Ask students to look at the books and read after
the tape .
- Call on some students to read aloud .
- Correct their pronunciation .
3. Consolidation :
- Have students work in groups discussing the
advantanges and disadvantanges of TV .
- Call on some groups to present their ideas .
- Correct if necessary .
4. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by making 2 sentences
with them .
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 89 in workbook .
- Prepare part B1,2 .
class .
- Read the summary aloud .
- Look at the picture and answer
the question .
- Listen to the tape .
- Look at the book and read after
the tape .
- Read aloud .
- Work in groups .
- Give the ideas in front of the
class .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Thursday , April 5th 2008
Period 89 :
<b> UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN </b>
Lesson 4 : B – What’s on ? ( B1,2 )
I. The aims :
The students continue to practice the topic about TV , they talk about their
favorite programs and the time of some programs on TV .
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Sports show - Children’s program
- Early news - Weather forecast
- The world today - A first ful of dollars’
2. Grammar :
What kinds of programs do you like ?
III. Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>
- Have students play a game : Jumbled words .
+ RGMAPOR
+ NEATERGE
+ SUMIC
+ VOMEI
+ REHATTE
+ ODARI
- Call on 2 students to go to the board and write
down .
- Remark and give marks .
2. New activities :
A. Listen . Then practice with a partner .
- Ask students to look at the picture and answer the
question: What’s on TV ?
- Introduce the situation of the dialogue , then ask
students to guess what kinds of programs Nga/ Ba
likes.
- Call on some students to give their predictions .
- Have students look at the book and listen to the
tape and check their prediction .
- Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue .
- Call on 3or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of
the class .
- Correct their pronunciation .
* Now answer :
- Ask students to read the dialogue again to find out
the answers for the questions .
- Have students work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of
the class .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
a. No’ she doesn’t because there aren’t many good
programs for teenagers .
b. Ba likes to watch sports shows, cartoons and
movies .
c. Nga likes to watch programs about teenagers in
other countries .
d. Because they don’t play the kind of music she
likes .
e. She is going to listen to the radio and maybe read
a book .
- Ask students to write in the notebooks .
B. Listen . write the times of the programs .
- Have students look at 5 programs in part 2 .
- Ask them to predict the times of these programs .
- Call on some students to give their predictions .
- Ask them to listen to the tape and check their
prediction.
- Play the tape again for students .
- Call on some students to give the answers in front
of the class .
- Have students listen to the tape again and check
the answers .
- Play a game .
+ Program
+ Teenager
+ Music
+ Movie
+ Theater
+ Radio
- Go to the board and write .
- Look at the picture and answer
the question .
- Listen and guess .
- Give the prediction .
- Look at the book , listen to the
tape and check the prediction .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the class .
- Read the dialogue again to find
the answers .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and answering
in front of the class.
- Write in the notebook .
- Look at the programs in the
book .
- Predict the time of the
programs .
- Give the prediction in front of
the class .
- Listen to the tape .
- Give the answers.
- Listen to the tape and check the
answers .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>
- Correct and give the answer key :
a. Children’s programs : 5:oo
b. Early News : 6:oo
c. Weather forecast : 6:10
d. The world Today : 6: 15
e. Movie : “ A firstful of dollars” : 7:oo
- Have students write the answers in the notebooks .
3. Consolidation :
- Give some cues then ask students to practice
asking and answering :
+ Morning News
+ Teenagers.
+ The world of animals .
+ Music programs .
- Have students work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Correct the mistakes .
4. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words .
- Do exercise 1,2 at page 90 in workbook .
- Prepare part 3,4 .
- Write in the notebooks .
- Write .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the class .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Friday , April 6th 2008
Period 90:
<b> UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN </b>
Lesson 5 : B- What’s on ? ( B3,4 )
I. The aims :
After the lesson , the students will understand about popular TV programs .
They will continue to know some more vocabulary about TV programs .
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Audience - To contest
- Artist - Contestant
- To perform - Folk music
- Imports - To include
- Satellite - Cable TV
2. Grammar :
Review : the simple present tense .
III. Technique :
Explanation , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork .
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , pictures , tape , cassete , sub- board .
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have students play a game :
Noughts and Crosses
EX: What kind of programs do you like?
I like to watch Early News .
- Have students play in 2 groups .
- State the group which wins the game.
2. New activities :
A. Listen and read . Then answer the questions .
- Ask students to look at the three pictures and
identify them .
- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then
explain some new words :
+ Audience : The person who watches the shows
.
+ Artist ( n ) : A famous singer .
+ To perform ( v ) :
+ To contest ( v ) = To compete
+ Contestant ( n ) = Competitor
+ Folk music ( n ) :
+ Imports ( n ) = foreign series .
+ To include ( v ) :
- Have students read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Check new words by playing a game called
rub out and remember .
- Have students do an exercise : T or F
prediction .
1. Pop music , contests , imports are popular TV
programs .
2. Teenagers like to listen to classical music .
3. There are contests of knowledge .
4. The contestants are students , workers , TV
viewers .
5. Imports are very expensive .
- Have students work in groups in 2 minutes .
- Call on some groups to give their predictions .
- Ask students to look at the books , listen to the
tape and check their predictions .
- Call on some students to give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F
- Have students read the passage aloud .
- Correct their pronunciation .
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
All class take part in the game .
- Play game in 2 groups .
- Look at three pictures and identify
them .
- Listen and write .
Read new words in chorus and
individually , guess the meanings ,
then copy down .
- Play a game .
_ Do an exercise .
- Work in groups .
- give the prediction .
Listen to the tape and check .
- Give the answers in front of the class
- Read the passage aloud .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>
- Ask students to work in pairs asking and
asnwering the questions in the books .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the
class .
- Correct the mistakes and give the correct
answers .
a. Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music
and see the shows of their favorite artists .
b. They are students , workers or family
members .
c. Imports usually include police and hospitals .
d. Students’ answer.
B. Write. Complete the passage . Use the words
in the box .
- Ask students to look at the words in the box
and read them aloud .
- Explain some new words to students .
+ To be possible : the same meaning with Can.
+ Satellite ( n ) :
+ Cable TV ( n ) :
- Have students complete the passage , using the
words in the box .
- Ask students to exchange the results with the
partners .
- Call on some students to give the results in
front of the class .
- Correct and give the answer key :
1. Around 2. Watch 3. Listen 4. Series
5. Show 6. Like 7. Station 8. Receive
9. Cities 10 . Possible
- Ask 2 students to read the passage aloud .
3. Consolidation :
- Have students take a survey :
Ex: S1: Do you want to hear pop music ?
S2: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t .
Or : S1: What TV programs do you want to see?
S2: I want to see the contests .
_ Have students work in groups .
( Each group has a secretary )
4. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines
for each .
- Do exercise 3,4 at page 91 in workbook .
- Review for doing a test in the next lesson .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and answering in
front of the class .
- Read the words in the box .
- Listen and write .
- Complete the passage .
- Exchange the results with the
partners .
- Give the results in front of the class .
- Read the completed passage aloud .
- Take a survey .
- Listen .
- Work in groups .
- Write homework .
<b>WEEK 31</b>
Preparing date : Wednesday, April 11th 2008
Period 91:
Name Pop music Contest Imports others
Lan
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>
<b> A WRITTEN TEST</b>
Time : 45 minutes
I. The aims :
The students apply their knowledge to do the test , and through the test the teacher
can be able to know the knowledge of each student . From that will have the method
to teach them well.
II. Test :
A. Even Test .
I. Choose the correct answers .
1. I can’t go out for a walk now . I ………..my homework .
A. Must do B. Must to do C. Must doing
2. My father is a …………football player .
A. Skill B. Skillful C. Skillfully
3. Would you like to go to the movies to night ?
A. Yes , I do B. Yes, I like C. I’d love to
4. ………do you like ?
A. What of programs B. What kinds of programs C. What of kinds programs
5. In 1960s , ……….. in Vietnam didn’t have a TV set .
A. Most of people B. Most people C. Most of the people
6. I ought to finish my homework before I………..table tennis .
A. Will play B. Play C. Am playing
7. Playing chess after dinner sounds …………..to me .
A. Boring B. Bored C. Boringly
8. We’ ll take a walk instead ………riding a bicycle.
A. Of B. For C. With
II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets .
1. I’d like ( tell ) ………you something about myself .
2. Children should ( spend )………only a small part of their freetime ( play )
..
…
……….video games .
3. She ( not like ) ………..riding . She ( prefer )………..walking .
4. Nam prefers ( take )………part in sports to ( watch )………them.
5. Lan usually ( watch )……….TV in the evening .
III. Read the dialogue between Ba and Nam , then answer the questions .
Ba : Would you like to see a movie , Nam ?
Nam : Yes , I’d love to . What would you like tosee ?
Ba : There is an interesting movie on at the New Age theater .
Nam : What movie is it ?
Ba : It’s a detective movie .
Nam : OK . Let’s go this evening then .
Ba : I’m sorry I can’t . I have to finish my homework tonight . What about
tomorrow evening ?
Nam : Sorry . I’m going to visit my grandmother . How about Friday evening ?
Ba : That’s OK . Let’s meet at half past seven in front of the theater .
1. What would Ba like to see ?
………..
2. Will Ba and Nam go to the theater tonight ?
.
………
3. What is Nam going to do tomorrow evening ?
………
4. Where will they meet ?
………
IV. Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given .
1. Nam is a good table tennis player .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>
2. Why don’t we go to the amusement center ?
=> What about ………?
3. He likes playing soccer better than watching TV .
=> He prefers ……….
4. You should stay inside at recess .
=> I advise ……….
V. Listen . Then check True or False in the boxes .
Statements T F
1. Nga , Lan and Long didn’t go to their English class yesterday.
2. Nga didn’t stay at home . She visited her grandmother .
3. Lan ate out in a restaurant with her friends .
4. Long watched TV and listened to music .
B. Odd Test :
I. Choose the best answer :
1. You ought ………..to the dentist .
A. to go B. go C. going
2. This river is very ……….for the swimmers .
A. danger B. dangerous C. dangerously
3. What would you like ………..?
A. see B. seeing C. to see
4. ……….is a fun , easy and inexpensive activity .
A. a walking B. walking C. to walk
5. There are many good programs ………….teenagers .
A. on B. for C. with
6. We can learn more about the undersea world ……….Jacques Couteau’s
invention.
A. thanks to B. thanking to C. with thanks to
7. John is a fast runner . He runs very ……….
A. fast B. fastly C. quick .
8. Which do you prefer , playing sports or watching TV ?
A. I prefer playing sports and watching TV to doing other things .
B. I prefer playing sports to watching TV .
C. I prefer playing sports because it can help me to stay healthy .
II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in bracbets .
1. When my father ( be ) …………young , He ( drink ) ………..a lot of wine .
2. They ( perform ) ……….” Romeo and Juliet” last Sunday .
3. She’ d like ( drink ) ………a glass of cold water .
4. Many years ago, many people in Vietnam ( not have ) ……….TV sets.
5. My younger brother prefers ( play ) ……….chess to ( watch) ..
.cartoons .
…………
6. Mai ( not like )………..reading books . She likes listening to music .
III. Read the dialogue between Ba and Nam , then answer the questions .
Ba : Would you like to see a movie , Nam ?
Nam : Yes , I’d love to . What would you like tosee ?
Ba : There is an interesting movie on at the New Age theater .
Nam : What movie is it ?
Ba : It’s a detective movie .
Nam : OK . Let’s go this evening then .
Ba : I’m sorry I can’t . I have to finish my homework tonight . What about
tomorrow evening ?
Nam : Sorry . I’m going to visit my grandmother . How about Friday evening ?
Ba : That’s OK . Let’s meet at half past seven in front of the theater .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>
……….
2. Why doesn’t Ba go to the theater tonight ?
……….
3. Is Nam going to see a play with his parents tomorrow evening ?
………..
4. When will they go to the theater ?
……….
IV. Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given .
1. How about going to the movies this week ?
=> Why ……….
2. My father drives very carefully .
=> My father is ………
3. Reading books is more boring than watching TV .
=> Watching TV is more………
4. You advise you not to watch TV too late .
=> You should ……….
V. Listen . Then check True or False in the boxes .
Statements T F
1. Nga , Lan and Long didn’t go to their English class yesterday.
2. Nga didn’t stay at home . She visited her grandmother .
3. Lan ate out in a restaurant with her friends .
4. Long watched TV and listened to music .
III. Key :
EvenTest :
I. Choose the best answer .
1. A 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. B 7. A 8. A
II . Supply the correct forms of the verbs .
1. To tell 2. Spend - playing 3. doesn’t like – prefers
4. taking - watching 5. watches
III. Answer the questions .
1. He would like to see a movie .
2. No, they won’t .
3. He is going to visit his grandmother .
4. They will meet in front of the theater .
IV. Rewrite these sentences .
1. Nam plays table tennis well .
2. What about going to the amusement center ?
3. He prefers playing soccer to watching TV .
4. I advise you to stay inside at recess .
V. Listen .
1.T 2. F 3. T 4. F
Odd Test :
I. Choose the best answer :
1. A 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. A 7. A 8. B
II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs .
1. was - drank 2. performed 3. to drink
4. didn’t have 5. playing – watching 6. doesn’t like
III. Answer the questions .
1. It’s on at the New Age Theater .
2. Because he has to finish his homework .
3. No, he isn’t .
4. They will go to the theater on Friday evening .
IV. Rewrite these sentences .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>
2. My father is a very careful driver .
3. Watching TV is more interesting than reading books .
4. You should not watch TV too late .
V. Listen :
1.T 2. F 3. T 4. F
Tape :
Yesterday was Sunday . Nga , Lan and Long did not go to their English class . They
did different things last night . Nga stayed at home . She watched TV and played
chess with her grandmother . Lan visited her friendsand ate out in a restaurant with
them . Long played video games and listened to pop music .
IV. Remark and homework :
Prepare unit 15 – A1 .
<b>Period 91:</b>
<b> UNIT 15 : GOING OUT </b>
Lesson 1 : A – Video games ( A1 )
I. The aims :
After the lesson , the students will be able to give the advice and respond for not
doing something such as : playing video games . They will talk about video games
and disadvantages of playing video games .
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Video games - Arcade
- Amusement center - Addictive
2. Grammar :
Structure : Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade .
No, I won’t .
III. Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork ,
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board .
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have Ss play a game : Networks .
- Have Ss play game in 2 groups .
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2. New activities :
- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss
to look at the picture and answer the question :
What can you see in the picture ?
- Introduce some new words :
+ Amusement center ( n ) : A place where we can
go to play some games for relaxing .
+ Video games ( n ) :
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
2 groups take part in the game .
Discuss in groups , then Ss go to the
board and write down .
- Listen and answer the question .
- Listen and write .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>
+ Arcade ( n ) :
+ Addictive ( adj ) :
- Have students read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Have students play a game : what and where .
- Have students look at the dialogue and listen to
the tape .
- Ask students to read after the tape .
- Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue.
- Call on 3 or 4 pairs to practice reading in front of
the class .
- Correct their pronunciation .
- Introduce the new model sentence :
+ Don’t spend too much of your time in the
arcade.
=> No, I won’t .
( Advise somebody not to do something .)
- Ask students to make examples as model .
- Ask students to read the dialogue again and find
the answers for the questions in the book .
- Have students work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering in front of the class .
- Have some students go to the board and write the
correct answers .
- Ask students to write the answers in the
notebooks .
a. He’s going to the amusement center .
b. He’s going to play video games .
c. He goes to the amusement center about once a
week .
d. No, he doesn’t .
e. He usually stays for about an hour .
f. Because video games can be addictive .
g. He will do his homework later .
3. Consolidation :
- Give a mapped dialogue and ask students to look
at carefully .
YOU YOUR FRIEND
Where ….going ? Amusement center
What …….do? video games
How often ? 2/ week
Don’t spend ….
video games …
Don’t forget ……
homework .
- Have students work in pairs .
- Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front the class .
- Correct the mistake if necessary .
4. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words and structure by
- Read new words .
- Play a game .
- Look at the book and listen to the
tape .
- Read after the tape .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the class .
- Listen .
- Make examples as model .
- Find the answers for the questions
- Work in pairs .
- Practice asking and answering in
front of the class .
- go to the board and write the
answers .
- Write in the notebooks .
- Look at the mapped dialogue .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the class .
- Write homework .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=195>
making 2 sentences with each .
- Do exercise 1, 2 in workbook .
- Prepare part A2,3 .
<b>Period 92 :</b>
<b> UNIT 15 : GOING OUT </b>
Lesson 2 : A- Video games ( A 2, 3 )
I. The aims :
By the end of the lesson , students will be able to understand video games and
some disadvantages of playing video games .
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Inventor - Social skill
- Dizzy - Premises
- To develop - Robbery
- To identify - Industry
2. Grammar :
- Modal verbs .
- The present simple tense .
III. Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Ask students some questions such as :
+ Do you like playing video games ?
+ How often do you play video games ?
+ How long do you usually spend playing video games?
+ What do you think about playing video games ?
………
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2. New activities :
A. Listen and read .
- Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask
students to do an exercise : True or False prediction .
1. Children like playing video games because they are
good fun .
2. It’ s very good for children to spend too much time
on their own .
3. Playing video games for a long time will make the
children become tired .
4. Children mustn’t play outdoors with their friends .
5. Some inventors become rich when they are very
- Greetings .
- Answer T’s questions .
- Listen and do exercise .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=196>
young .
- Have students work in groups .
- Call on some groups to give their prediction.
- Ask students to look at the books and listen to the tape
then check their prediction .
- Call on some students to give the answers .
- Correct and give the correct answers :
1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T
- Have students listen to the tape again and introduce
some new words :
+ Inventor ( n ) The person who invents videogames .
+ Dizzy ( adj ) :
+ To develop ( v ) :
+ Social skill ( n ) :
- Have students read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Ask students to read the text in silent .
- call on 3or 4 students to read the text aloud .
- Correct their pronunciation .
* Now answer , complete the sentences .
- Have students read the text again to find out the
answers .
- Have students exchange the results with the partners .
- Call on some students to give the answers in front of
the class .
- Correct the mistake and give the correct answers .
a) Many young people play video games .
b) Some inventors of video games become very rich .
c) The doctor thinks all children should take part in
outdoor activities with their friends .
d) The doctor says you should spend little time playing
video games .
- Have students write in the notebooks .
B. Complete the passage with the words in the box .
- Explain the request of the exercise then introduce
some new words .
+ To identify ( v ) :
+ Premises ( n ) :
+ Robbery ( n ) => robber ( n )
+ Industry ( n ) :
- Have students read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Have students complete the passage .
- Ask them to exchange the results with the partners .
- Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class
- Correct and give the key :
1. be 2. have 3. is 4. identify 5. are
6. use 7. can 8. will 9. buy 10. show
- Call on 2 students to read the completed passage
aloud
- Ask students to write down .
3. Consolidation :
- Have students work in groups discussing about the
disadvantages of playing video games .
- Call on some groups to demonstrate their ideas in
- Work in groups .
- Give the prediction .
- Listen to the tape and check
the prediction .
- Give the answers .
- Listen to the tape again .
- Read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Read the passage in silent .
- Read aloud .
- Read the passage again to find
the answers .
- Exchange the results with the
partners .
- Give the answers .
- Write down .
- Listen and write .
- Read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Complete the passage .
- Exchange the results .
- Give the answers .
- Read aloud .
- Write .
- Work in groups .
- Demonstrate the ideas .
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=197>
front of the class .
- Remark .
4. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each .
- Do exercise 3,4 in workbook .
- Prepare the next lesson .
- Write homework .
<b>Period 92:</b>
<b>UNIT 15 : GOING OUT</b>
Lesson 3 : A – Video games
I. The aims :
After the lesson , students will be able to give the advice with should and shouldn’t
.
II. Language content :
Review modal verbs with should and shouldn’t .
III. Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork .
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , sub- board .
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have students play a games : Slap the board .
+ Play outdoors .
+ Take part in activities .
+ Play with friends .
+ Play video games .
+ Stay up late .
- Have students play in 2 groups .
- Remark and lead in new lesson .
2.Presentation :
- Have students read the text in part A2 again then find
out the sentences using modal verbs .
- Call on some students to give the sentences in front of
the class .
- Give the table of grids and ask them to complete .
3. Practice :
- Ask students to use the grids to make sentences about
what they should do and shouldn’t do .
Ex : We should play outdoors .
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
- Play in 2 groups .
- Find the sentences using
modal verbs .
- Give the results .
- Complete the table .
- Make sentences .
Activities in freetime Should Shouldn’t
+ Play outdoors .
+ Play video games for
a long time .
+ Take part in activities
with friends.
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=198>
Yes , we should .
- Have students work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Correct the mistake .
4. Production :
- Have students play a game :
Noghts and crosses
- Ask students to make sentences with should and
shouldn’t .
Ex: We should play outdoors .
We shouldn’t play video games too much.
- Remark .
5. Homework :
- Write 5 sentences with should and shouldn’t .
- Prepare part B1,2 .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the class .
S1: We shouldn’t play video
games for a long time .
S2: No, we shouldn’t .
S1: We should take part in
activities with friends .
S2: Yes , we should .
- Play a game .
2 groups take part in the game .
- Make sentences with should
and shouldn’t .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Thursday , April 19th 2008
Period 93:
<b>UNIT 15 : GOING OUT</b>
Lesson 4 : B – In the city ( B1,2 )
I. The aims :
After the lesson students will be able to know about life in the city and life in
the country . Practice 4 skills : listening , reading , speaking and writing .
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- The rest - To scare - To hate
- Awake - Get used to - Direction
2. Grammar :
Review : the simple present tense and past tense .
III. Technique :
Brainstorming , Asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork .
IV. Teaching aids :
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=199>
Textbook , tape , cassette , Pictures about the city and the country .
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have students play a game : Wordsquare .
- Ask students to find the words which relate to the
city and country .
- Have students work in groups .
-Remark and lead in new lesson .
2. New activities :
- Ask students to look at the picture and answer the
question : What is the picture about ?
- Ask students some questions such as :
+ Do you like to live in the city or in the country ?
Why / why not ?
- Introduce the situation of the lesson .
- Ask students to look at the book and listen to the tape
, then answer the question : Lan and Hoa , who likes
to live in the city or in the country .
- Play the tape for students .
- Have students give the answers .
- Introduce some new words to students :
+ The rest ( n ) :
+ Awake ( adj ) :
+ To scare ( v ) :
+ To hate ( v ) = to dislike
+ To get used to + N .
+ Direction ( n ) :
- Have students read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Have students play a game : rub out and remember .
- Have students discuss about life in the city and life
in the country .
* Brainstorming :
Life in the city Life in the country
Crowded Little traffic
………… …………..
- Have students work in groups .
- Call on some groups to give their ideas .
- Have students read the dialogue in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of
the class .
- Greetings .
- Play a game .
Discuss in groups to find the
words which relate to the city
and the country .
- Work in groups .
- Look at the picture and answer
the question .
- Answer T’s questions .
- Listen .
- Look at the book and listen to
the tape then answer the
questions .
- Give the answers .
- Listen and write .
- Read new words in chorus and
individually .
- Play a game .
- Discuss about life in the city
and life in the country .
- Work in groups .
- Give the ideas .
- Work in pairs reading the
dialogue .
- Practice reading the dialogue in
</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=200>
- Correct the pronunciation .
- Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the
answers for the questions .
- Have students play a game : Lucky numbers
1. Where did Hoa live before ?
2. Why doesn’t Hoa like the city ?
3. LN .
4. What does Hoa do in the evening ?
5. What does Hoa dislike most in the city ? Why ?
6. Does She like the city ?
7. LN
8 . Why did Hoa like living in a village in Hue?
- Remark and ask students to write the answers in the
notebooks .
3. Consolidation :
- Ask students to use the questions in part B2 to work
in pairs discussing about life in the city and life in the
country .
- Have students work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .
- Correct and remark.
4. Homework :
- Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each
- Write the answers in part B2 in the exercise books .
- Prepare part B3,4 .
front of the class .
- Find the answers .
- Play a game in 2 groups .
- Write the answers in the
notebooks .
- Discuss about life in the city
and in the country .
- Work in pairs .
- Practice in front of the class .
- Write homework .
Preparing date : Friday , April 20th 2008
Period 95 :
<b>UNIT 15 : GOING OUT</b>
Lesson 5 : B – In the city ( B 4 )
I. The aims :
After the lesson students will know how Hoa got used to the life in the city and
what she could do . They practice reading and listening skills .
II. Language content :
1. Vocabulary :
- Rarely - To socialize
2. Grammar :
- Review : The simple present tense and past simple tense .
- Like / Prefer + to infinitive ; Like + gerund
III. Technique :
Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures .
IV. Teaching aids :
Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures .
V. Procedure :
T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up :
- Greetings .
- Have students play a game : Networks - Greetings .- Play a game .
</div>
<!--links-->
